2007 Saturn OUTLOOK Owner Manual M
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be
obtained from your dealer/retailer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
SATURN and the SATURN Emblem are registered
trademarks of Saturn Corporation. GENERAL
MOTORS and GM are registered trademarks and
the name OUTLOOK is a trademark of General
Motors Corporation.
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from
beginning to end when they first receive their new
vehicle to learn about the vehicle’s features
and controls. Pictures and words work together to
explain things.
This manual includes the latest information at the
time it was printed. We reserve the right to make
changes after that time without further notice.
This manual describes features that may be
available in this model, but your vehicle may not
have all of them. For example, more than one
entertainment system may be offered or your
vehicle may have been ordered without a front
passenger or rear seats.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about
the vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.
It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual
and the page number where it can be found.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick
reference.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 15861569 B Second Printing
©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We tell you what the hazard is and what to do to
help avoid or reduce the hazard. Please read
these cautions. If you do not, you or others could
be hurt.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this
book. A box with the word CAUTION is used to
tell about things that could hurt you or others if you
were to ignore the warning.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not
do this” or “Do Not let
this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could
hurt you or other people.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
You will also find notices in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific component,
control, message, gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that
could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage
the vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could
be costly. The notice tells what to do to help avoid
the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle
which use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in
Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
A. Manual Seat Adjustment Bar.
C. Manual Reclining Seatback Lever. See
If your vehicle has a manual bucket seat you can
adjust the seat forward or rearward with the
bar located under the front of the seat cushion.
Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seat
to where you want it and release the bar. Try to
move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is
locked in place.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Power Seats
If your vehicle has a manual driver seat height
adjuster, it is located on the outboard side of the
information. To raise the seat, move the lever
upward repeatedly until the seat is at the desired
height. To lower the seat, move the lever
downward repeatedly until the seat is at the
desired height.
Driver’s Seat with Power Seat Control, Power
Recline, and Power Lumbar shown
A. Power Seat Adjustment Control.
B. Power Reclining Seatback Control. See
page 12.
If the vehicle has power seats, the controls used
to operate them are located on the outboard
side of the seats.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the
control forward or rearward.
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle has this
feature, the handle is
located on the inboard
side of the seatback.
See Manual Seats
on page 9 for more
information.
Your vehicle may have additional features to
adjust your vehicle’s power seat:
• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the
entire control up or down.
• Raise or lower the front part of the seat
cushion by moving the front of the control up
or down.
• Raise or lower the rear part of the seat
cushion by moving the rear of the control up
or down.
Your vehicle may have a memory function which
allows seat settings to be saved and recalled.
information.
Turn the handle rearward to decrease lumbar
support. Turn the handle forward to increase
lumbar support.
Keep in mind that as your seating position
changes, as it may during long trips, so should the
position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat
as needed.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Lumbar
Heated Seats
If the seats have power lumbar, the controls used
to operate this feature are located on the
page 10 for more information.
On vehicles with heated front seats the controls
are located on the center console near the climate
controls. To operate the heated seats the
ignition must be on.
• To increase lumbar support, press and hold
the front of the control.
I(Heated Seatback): Press this button to turn
on the heated seatback.
• To decrease lumbar support, press and hold
the rear of the control.
J(Heated Seat and Seatback): Press this
button to turn on the heated seat and seatback.
• To raise the height of the lumbar support,
press and hold the top of the control.
The light on the button will come on to indicate that
the feature is working. Press the button to cycle
through the temperature settings of high, medium,
and low and to turn the heat to the seat off.
Indicator lights above the button will show the level
of heat selected: three for high, two for medium,
and one for low.
• To lower the height of the lumbar support,
press and hold the bottom of the control.
Release the control when the lower seatback
reaches the desired level of lumbar support.
Keep in mind that as your seating position
changes, as it may during long trips, so should the
position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat
as needed.
The heated seats will turn off ten seconds after
the ignition is turned off. If you want to use
the heated seat feature after you restart your
vehicle, you will need to press the heated seat or
seatback button again.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has remote vehicle start and is
started using the remote keyless entry transmitter,
the front heated seats will be turned on to the
high setting if it is cold outside. See ″Remote
is inserted into the ignition and the ignition
is turned on, the heated seat feature will turn off.
To turn the heated seat feature back on, press
the desired button.
Memory Seat and Mirrors
Your vehicle may have the memory package.
The controls for this feature are located on the
driver’s door panel, and are used to program and
recall memory settings for the driver’s seat and
outside mirrors.
To save your positions in memory, do the
following:
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback
recliner and lumbar and both outside mirrors
to a comfortable position.
more information.
Not all mirrors will have the ability to save and
recall the mirror positions.
2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps let
you know that the position has been stored.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A second seating and mirror position can be
programmed by repeating the above steps and
pressing button 2.
Then try recalling the memory position again by
pressing the appropriate memory button. If
the memory position is still not being recalled, see
your dealer/retailer for service.
To recall the memory positions, the vehicle must
be in PARK (P). Press and release either button 1
or button 2 corresponding to the desired driving
position. The seat and outside mirrors will move to
the position previously stored. You will hear a
single beep.
Easy Exit Seat
The control for this feature is located on the
driver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2.
With the vehicle in PARK (P), the exit position
can be recalled by pressing the exit button. You
will hear a single beep. The driver’s seat will
move back.
If you use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to enter your vehicle and the remote
recall memory feature is on, automatic seat
and mirror movement will occur. See “MEMORY
SEAT RECALL” under DIC Vehicle Customization
information.
If the easy exit seat feature is on in the Driver
Information Center (DIC), automatic seat
movement will occur when the key is removed
from the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under
on page 250 for more information.
To stop recall movement of the memory feature at
any time, press one of the power seat controls,
memory buttons, or power mirror buttons.
Further programming for the memory seat feature
can be done using the DIC. You can select or
cancel the following:
If something has blocked the driver’s seat while
recalling a memory position, the driver’s seat recall
may stop working. If this happens, press the
appropriate control for the area that is not recalling
for two seconds, after the obstruction is removed.
• The automatic easy exit seat feature.
• The remote memory seat recall feature.
For programming information, see DIC Vehicle
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In vehicles with seats that have manual reclining
seatbacks, the lever used to operate them is
located on the outboard side of the seat.
Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Lift the recline lever.
{CAUTION:
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place.
You can lose control of the vehicle if you
try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when you do
not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
To return the seatback to an upright position, do
the following:
1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to
the seatback and the seatback will return to
the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
In vehicles with seats that have power reclining
seatbacks, the control used to recline them
is located on the outboard side of the seat behind
page 10 for more information.
Sitting in a reclined position when your
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even if you buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you are reclined
like this.
• To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the
control rearward.
• To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of
the control forward.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be against your body.
Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is
in motion, have the seatback upright. Then
sit well back in the seat and wear your
safety belt properly.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. To lower
the head restraint,
press the release
Head Restraints
button, located on the
headrest post on the top
of the seatback, while
you push the head
restraint down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the
restraint is at the same height as the top of
the occupant’s head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering and Exiting the Third Row
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
{CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while
the second row is folded, or folded and
tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden
stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat
to the passenger seating position. Push
and pull on the seat to make sure it is
locked into place.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
A. Seat Adjustment Handle.
B. Reclining Seatback Strap.
C. Sliding Seat Lever.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access the third row:
Returning the Seat to the Seating
Position
To return the second row seat to its normal
seating position:
1. Make sure there are no objects on the floor
behind the second row seat, or in the seat
tracks on the floor.
2. Pull the seatback rearward until it is locked in
place.
3. Slide the seat rearward by pushing on the
seatback until it is locked into place.
1. Make sure there are no objects on the floor in
front of or on the second row seat, or in the
seat tracks on the floor.
4. Push down on the rear of the seat cushion
until it is locked in place.
5. Push and pull on the seatback and seat
cushion to make sure they are locked in place
2. On seats with folding armrests, make sure the
armrest is in the upright position.
6. Make sure the safety belt is not under the seat
cushion.
3. Make sure the safety belt is unfastened and in
the stowed position.
4. Pull the sliding seat lever (C) forward and
move the seatback forward. The seat
cushion will automatically fold, and the entire
seat will slide forward.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pull forward on the reclining seatback
strap (B) and push down on the seatback.
Reclining the Seatbacks
To recline the seatback:
4. If the headrest hits the front seat, slide the
second row seat rearward.
1. Leaning forward in the seat, pull the reclining
seatback strap (B).
To return the seatback to the seating position, lift
the upper corner of the seatback and push it
rearward until it locks into place. Push and pull on
the seatback to make sure it is locked.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position,
then release the strap to lock the seatback
in place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
Adjusting the Seats
To adjust the second row seats, pull outward on
the seat adjustment handle (A). Slide the seat
forward or rearward to the desired position.
Release the handle and push and pull on the seat
to make sure it is locked.
Folding the Rear Seat
To fold the second row seats:
1. Make sure there is nothing on or under
the seat.
2. Make sure the armrest is in the upright
position, and the safety belt is unfastened.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fold the seatback:
Third Row Seats
1. Make sure there is nothing on or under
the seat.
{CAUTION:
Using the third row seating position while
the second row is folded, or pushed
forward in the entry position, could cause
injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure
to return the seat to the passenger
seating position. Push and pull on the
seat to make sure it is locked into place.
The third row seats can be folded forward or
removed.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause damage to the
seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle
the safety belts and return them to their normal
stowed position before folding a rear seat.
2. Disconnect the rear safety belt mini-latch,
using a key in the slot on the mini-buckle,
let the belt retract into the headliner. Stow the
mini-latch in the holder located in the
headliner.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pull up on the
release lever located
on the back of the
seat. The headrest
moves forward
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could
move forward in a sudden stop or crash.
That could cause injury to the person
sitting there. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
automatically.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked in place.
4. Push the seatback forward to lay flat.
To return the seatback to the seating position:
{CAUTION:
1. Raise the seatback into place by using
the pullstrap from the rear of the vehicle, or by
pushing it into place from inside the vehicle.
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not
provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the rear
seatback, always check to be sure that the
safety belts are properly routed and
attached, and are not twisted.
2. Make sure the headrest is locked into place
before sitting in the seat.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Make sure the safety belt is not twisted, and
reconnect the center safety belt mini-latch to
the mini-buckle.
5. Pull on the safety belt to be sure the mini-latch
is secure.
Installing the Third row Seats
1. Make sure the seatback is folded forward
before installing the seat. See Folding the
Seatback earlier in this section.
The seats must be placed in the proper
locations for the legs to attach correctly. The
wider seat must be installed on the driver
side and the narrower seat on the passenger
side. Make sure to remove the bolts from
the holes in the floor before installing
the seats.
Removing the Third Row Seats
1. Remove the cargo management system, if it is
in the vehicle. See Cargo Management System
on page 164.
2. Make sure there is nothing on or under
the seat.
2. Place the seat on the vehicle floor so that the
front seat hooks are on the vehicle bars.
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or
the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety
belts and return them to their normal stowed
position before folding a rear seat.
3. Reinstall the bolts, and torque to 55 Y
(41 lb ft). Pull up on the seat to make sure
it is locked in place.
3. Fold the seatback down. See Folding the
Seatback earlier in this section.
4. Remove the rear bolts located on the floor on
each side of the seat.
5. Remove the seat by tilting it slightly upward,
and then pulling it out of the rear of the vehicle
in one motion.
4. Raise the seatback to its upright position.
Push and pull on the seatback to make
sure it is locked into place.
5. Push the headrest up into position. Push and
pull on the headrest to make sure it is locked
into place.
6. Put the bolts back into the holes on the floor
so they do not get misplaced.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use
safety belts properly. It also tells you some things
you should not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she
cannot wear a safety belt properly. If you
are in a crash and you are not wearing a
safety belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside the
vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be
seriously injured or killed. In the same
crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passengers’
belts are fastened properly too.
Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and
your passengers to buckle your safety belts. See
page 212.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law says to wear safety belts. Here is why:
They work.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do
have a crash, you do not know if it will be a
bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast
as it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be
so serious that even buckled up, a person
would not survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people who buckle up
can survive and sometimes walk away. Without
belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in
vehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashes
buckling up does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a
seat on wheels.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The
rider does not stop.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The person keeps going until stopped by
something. In a real vehicle, it could be the
windshield...
or the instrument panel...
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a
safety belt or not. But you can unbuckle a
safety belt, even if you are upside down. And
your chance of being conscious during and
after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get
out, is much greater if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I
have to wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so
they work with safety belts — not instead of
them. Every airbag system ever offered
for sale has required the use of safety belts.
Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,
you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other
collisions.
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle
does. You get more time to stop. You stop
over more distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety belts
make such good sense.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far
from home, why should I wear safety
belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know
about safety belts and children. And there
are different rules for smaller children and babies.
If a child will be riding in your vehicle, see
everyone’s protection.
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are
in an accident — even one that is not your
fault — you and your passengers can be hurt.
Being a good driver does not protect you
from things beyond your control, such as bad
drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths occur at speeds of
less than 40 mph (65 km/h).
First, you will want to know which restraint
systems your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the
belt across you very quickly. If this happens,
let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks.
1. Close and lock the door.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is
secure. If the belt is not long enough,
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To
see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the
height that is right for you. Improper shoulder
belt height adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. See
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a
crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.
And you would be less likely to slide under the lap
belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at
your abdomen. This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or
crash.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give
nearly as much protection this way.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt
is too loose. In a crash, you could slide
under the lap belt and apply force at your
abdomen. This could cause serious or
even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at the pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries. Always buckle
your belt into the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt
goes over an armrest like this. The belt
would be much too high. In a crash, you
can slide under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied at the abdomen,
not at the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the
belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear
the shoulder belt under your arm. In a
crash, your body would move too far
forward, which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the belt
would apply too much force to the ribs,
which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure
internal organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It
should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted
belt. In a crash, you would not have the
full width of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight
so it can work properly, or ask your
dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
height adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Incorrect positioning of the shoulder
belt can reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt.
To move it down, push
down on the button (A)
and move the height
adjuster to the desired
position. You can move
the height adjuster up by
pushing up on the
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way. When
the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up
the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should
rest on the stitching on the safety belt, near
the guide loop on the side wall.
shoulder belt guide.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out
of the way. If you slam the door on it, you can
damage both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without pushing the
button down to make sure it has locked into
position.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it
is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt
in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,
the key to making safety belts effective is wearing
them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do not wear
safety belts.
Right Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s
page 30.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except
for one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion
of the belt out all the way, you will engage the
child restraint locking feature. If this happens, let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder
belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, throughout the
pregnancy.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted
people in the rear seat are hurt more often in
crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And
they can strike others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
If you are using the center third row seating
position and the safety belt is not attached, see
on reconnecting the safety belt to the mini-buckle.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across
you. Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let
the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull
the belt across you more slowly.
Here is how to wear one properly.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it
clicks. Pull up on the latch plate to make
sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the
way, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the
way and start again.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would
move forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder belt should
fit against your body.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In
a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic
bones. And you would be less likely to slide under
the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able
to take belt restraining forces.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide
added safety belt comfort for older children
who have outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder belt, the
comfort guide positions the belt away from
the neck and head.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
For outboard seating positions, when the safety
belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up the safety
belt webbing. The latch plate should rest on the
stitching on the safety belt, near the guide loop on
the side wall.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is a guide for each outboard passenger
positions in the second row seat and all passenger
positions in the third row. Here is how to install
a comfort guide to the safety belt:
For the third row center
position, locate the
comfort guide which is
located in a storage
pocket, at the top of the
seat, under the
headrest on the driver’s
side of the vehicle.
Third Row Center
Position
To access the comfort guide, you will first need
to move the headrest forward by pulling on the
handle behind the seatback. The comfort guide
will now be accessible. Pull the comfort guide
out of its storage location and then return the
headrest to its upright position.
Outboard Positions
The elastic cord on the comfort guide is
adjustable. You can make it longer or shorter
by squeezing the both ends of the plastic
adjuster.
1. For the outboard positions, remove the guide
from its storage clip on the interior body.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies
flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The
elastic cord must be under the belt. Then,
place the guide over the belt, and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the
guide.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn
may not provide the protection needed in
a crash. The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of the body
are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt
page 40. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take
them out of the guide. Slide the guide into
its storage location or on its storage clip.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for the
driver and right front passenger. Although you
cannot see them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They help tighten the safety belts during
the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal,
near frontal or side crash or a rollover if the
threshold conditions for pretensioner activation
are met.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your
dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When
you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will
wear, so the extender will be long enough for
you. To help avoid personal injury, do not
let someone else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender has been
designed for adults. Never use it for securing child
seats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction
sheet that comes with the extender.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and
probably other new parts for your safety belt
system. See Replacing Restraint System Parts
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety
Child Restraints
belts?
Older Children
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt
and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt should not
cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
According to accident statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can
strike other people who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older children need
to use safety belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats
should wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder
belt, but the child is so small that the
shoulder belt is very close to the child’s
face or neck?
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a
window, move the child toward the center of
the vehicle. Also see Rear Safety Belt
sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the
shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, so
that in a crash the child’s upper body would
have the restraint that belts provide.
Here two children are wearing the same
belt. The belt cannot properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two children
can be crushed together and seriously
injured. A belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the
belt in this way, in a crash the child might
slide under the belt. The belt’s force
would then be applied right on the child’s
abdomen. That could cause serious or
fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the child’s thighs. This applies belt force
to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This
includes infants and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and size of the
traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use
safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state
in the United States and in every Canadian
province says children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and never allow
children to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young children ride in
vehicles, they should have the protection provided
by appropriate restraints. Young children should
not use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,
unless there is no other choice. Instead, they need
to use a child restraint.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. A baby
does not weigh much — until a crash.
During a crash a baby will become so
heavy it is not possible to hold it. For
example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will
suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. A baby should be
secured in an appropriate restraint.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close
to, any airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection for
adults and older children, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on
child restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by
the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular restraint should
take into consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also whether or not
the restraint will be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn
infant’s neck is weak and its head weighs
so much compared with the rest of its
body. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facing
seat settles into the restraint, so the crash
forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the
back and shoulders. Infants always
should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there
are many different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is
designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,
the restraint will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is
quite unlike that of an adult or older child,
for whom the safety belts are designed. A
young child’s hip bones are still so small
that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may
not remain low on the hip bones, as it
should. Instead, it may settle up around
the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured
in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’s
head rests toward the center of the vehicle.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the
infant. The harness system holds the infant in
place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infant
positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint
for the child’s body with the harness and also
sometimes with surfaces such as T-shaped
or shelf-like shields.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed
for use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or
position children. A built-in child restraint
system is a permanent part of the motor
vehicle. An add-on child restraint system is a
portable one, which is purchased by the
vehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, an
add-on child restraint must be secured in the
vehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,
the child has to be secured within the child
restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be
sure the child restraint is designed to be
used in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a label
saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards. Then follow the instructions
for the restraint. You may find these
instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt
system. Some booster seats have a shoulder belt
positioner, and some high-back booster seats
have a five-point harness. A booster seat can also
help a child to see out the window.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child
restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats
by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system. See Lower
page 61 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is
not properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint in
the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle. Make sure
the child restraint is properly installed in
the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt
or LATCH system, following the
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint
which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement copy from the
manufacturer.
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint
can move around in a collision or sudden stop
and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in your
vehicle — even when no child is in it.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because there are different systems, it is important
to refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint. A child can be endangered in a crash if
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Securing the Child Within the Child
Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child
within the child restraint. One system, the
three-point harness, has straps that come down
over each of the infant’s shoulders and buckle
together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, and
a crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against
the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a crash if the child is not properly
secured in the child restraint. Make sure
the child is properly secured, following
the instructions that came with that
restraint.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend
that rear-facing child restraints be secured
in a rear seat, even if the airbag(s) are off.
{CAUTION:
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbag (if equipped) if the
system detects a rear-facing child restraint,
no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint
can move around in a collision or sudden
stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in your
vehicle — even when no child is in it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints
have lower anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during
driving or in a crash. This system is designed
to make installation of a child restraint easier. The
LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and
attachments on the child restraint that are made for
use with the LATCH system.
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use
the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that came with that
restraint, and also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with a top
tether, you must also use either the lower anchors
or the safety belts to properly secure the child
restraint. A child restraint must never be attached
using only the top tether and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the
vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments (B).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the
child restraint and its attachments. The following
explains how to attach a child restraint with these
attachments in your vehicle.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or
a dual tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the
anchor.
Top Tether Anchor
Some child restraints with top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top tether always to
be attached. In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have a top tether,
and that the tether be attached. In the United
States, some child restraints also have a
top tether. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether,
one can be obtained, in kit form, for many
child restraints. Ask the child restraint
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child
restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)
on the child restraint connects to the top tether
anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward
movement and rotation of the child restraint
during driving or in a crash.
manufacturer whether or not a kit is available.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Second Row — 60/40
Bench
Second Row — Bucket
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
Third Row
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
second row anchor
position has a label,
near the crease
between the seatback
and the seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors,
the top tether anchor
symbol is located on the
trim cover or near the
anchor.
Second Row — Bucket Shown, Bench Similar
The top tether anchors are located at the bottom
rear of the seatback for each seating position
in the second row. Open the trim cover to access
the anchors. Be sure to use an anchor located
on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger position or the third row outboard
seating positions, if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say
that the top tether must be attached. There is
no place to attach the top tether in these positions.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if
they are restrained in the rear rather than the front
for additional information.
Third Row Seat
The third row has one top tether anchor located at
the bottom rear of the center seatback. This
anchor should be used for the center seating
position only. Never install two top tethers using
the same top tether anchor.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor
in the vehicle is designed to hold only one
child restraint. Attaching more than one
child restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment to come
loose or even break during a crash. A
child or others could be injured if this
happens. To help prevent injury to people
and damage to your vehicle, attach only
one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not
attached to anchors, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured
or killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type
child restraint is properly installed using
the anchors, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint,
and also the instructions in this manual.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety
belts secured may cause damage to the safety
belt or the seat. When removing the child
restraint, always remember to return the safety
belts to their normal, stowed position before
folding the rear seat.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or
strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Secure any unused
safety belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull the
shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle
has one, after the child restraint has been
installed. Be sure to follow the
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to
the lower anchors. If the child restraint does
not have lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have lower anchors,
secure the child restraint with the top tether
and the safety belts. Refer to your child
restraint manufacturer instructions and the
instructions in this manual.
instructions of the child restraint
manufacturer.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Recline the seatback to the full reclined
position.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint or
the LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’s
safety belt assembly may cause damage to
these parts. Make sure when securing unused
safety belts behind the child restraint that
there is no contact between the child restraint
or the LATCH attachment parts and the
vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
Make sure the second row bench
seatbacks are aligned at the same
angle before placing the child restraint
on the seat. Make sure the third
row bench seatbacks are both upright
before placing the child restraint on
the seat.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2.3. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint
instructions and the following
instructions:
1.4. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child restraint to the
lower anchors.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head rest/restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,
if the vehicle has one. Refer to the child
restraint instructions and the following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
seatback.
2.2. If the anchor is covered, flip open the
trim cover to expose the anchor.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head rest/restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route
the tether over the
seatback.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has a fixed head
rest/restraint and
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position
you are using a dual
tether, route the
tether around the head
rest/restraint.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
There are no top tether anchors in the third row
outboard seating positions. Do not secure a
child restraint in these positions if a national or
local law requires that a top tether be anchored or
if the instructions that come with the restraint
say that the top tether must be anchored.
If the position you are
using has a fixed head
rest/restraint and
you are using a single
tether, route the
tether over the head
rest/restraint.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, and the
position that you are using has a top tether
anchor, attach and tighten the top tether to the
top tether anchor. Refer to the instructions
that came with the child restraint and to Lower
on page 61.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be
ready to work for an adult or larger child
passenger.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch
plate up the safety belt webbing. The latch
plate should rest on the stitching on the safety
belt, near the guide loop on the side wall.
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See Where
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a
small child in a forward-facing child restraint
or booster seat is detected. See Passenger
on this, including important safety information.
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if
the airbags are off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put
a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so
great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
page 86. We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if
the airbags are off.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
on page 10.
When the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag, the off indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should light and stay lit
when you start the vehicle. See Passenger
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
There is no top tether anchor at the right front
seating position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
tether must be anchored. See Lower Anchors
the child restraint has a top tether.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as
the instructions say.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle
the safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way
out of the retractor to set the lock.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit and stay
lit when you start the vehicle.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child
restraint.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head
restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and
feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.
If you are using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child restraint
as you tighten the belt. You should not be able
to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be ready
to work for an adult or larger child passenger. When
the safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up
the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt, near the upper
anchor on the side wall.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the
word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on
an attached label near the deployment opening.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the middle part of the steering wheel
for the driver and on the instrument panel for
the right front passenger.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
driver.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
right front passenger.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver, passenger
directly behind the driver, and the third
row outboard passenger position.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear along the headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s
airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all
airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger,
passenger directly behind the right front
passenger, and the third row outboard
passenger position.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about
the airbag system:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near
frontal crashes. They are not designed to
inflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in many
side crashes.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a
crash if you are not wearing your safety
belt — even if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash helps
reduce your chance of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejected from it.
Airbags are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are designed
to work with safety belts, but do not
replace them.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rear
crashes. Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe crashes where something hits the
side of your vehicle, during a vehicle
rollover, or in a severe frontal impact.
They are not designed to inflate in rear
crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a
safety belt properly — whether or not
there is an airbag for that person.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Airbags inflate with great force, faster
than the blink of an eye. Anyone who is
up against, or very close to, any airbag
when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily close to
the airbag, as you would be if you were
sitting on the edge of your seat or leaning
forward. Safety belts help keep you in
position before and during a crash.
Always wear your safety belt, even with
airbags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the
best protection for adults, but not for
young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
Always secure children properly in your
vehicle. To read how, see Older Children
on page 51.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door or side windows in
seating positions with seat-mounted side
impact airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the
Where Are the Airbags?
airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
page 212 for more information.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the
driver and right front passenger are in the side of
the seatbacks closest to the door.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and
an airbag, the airbag might not inflate
properly or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury or even
death. The path of an inflating airbag must
be kept clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an airbag, and
do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block
the inflation path of a seat-mounted side
impact airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front
passenger, passengers behind the driver and right
front passenger, and the third row outboard
passengers are in the ceiling above the side
windows.
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your
vehicle by routing the rope or tie down
through any door or window opening. If
you do, the path of an inflating roof-rail
airbag will be blocked.
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits a wide object
(like a wall).
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate
to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly
to the driver’s or right front passenger’s head and
chest. However, they are only designed to
inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined
deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are
used to predict how severe a crash is likely to
be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,
the airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle goes straight into the
object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle
design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during
vehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many
side impacts.
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy
is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit, the direction
of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle
slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal
airbags. Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint
according to crash severity. Your vehicle has
electronic frontal sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a moderate frontal
impact and a more severe frontal impact. For
moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate
at a level less than full deployment. For more
severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash
speeds. For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash
speed than if the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are
intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is
above the system’s designed threshold level.
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle
design.
roof-rail airbags, deployment is determined by the
location and severity of the side impact. In a
rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment
is determined by the direction of the roll.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas
from the inflator. Gas from the inflator fills
the airbag causing the bag to break out of the
cover and deploy. The inflator, the airbag,
and related hardware are all part of the airbag
module.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not
intended to inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
airbags are not intended to inflate in rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when either
side of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
system predicts that the vehicle is about to
roll over, or in a severe frontal impact.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the
steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles
with seat-mounted side impact airbags, there
are airbag modules in the side of the front
seatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles with
roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows
that have occupant seating positions.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether
an airbag should have inflated simply because
of the damage to a vehicle or because of what the
repair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits, the angle
of the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slows
down. For seat-mounted side impact and
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But airbags would not help in many types of
collisions, primarily because the occupant’s motion
is not toward those airbags. See When Should
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
steering wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything
more than a supplement to safety belts.
Airbags supplement the protection provided
by safety belts.
What Will You See After an Airbag
Inflates?
Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact
more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side
impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate,
so quickly that some people may not even realize
an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be
at least partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of the airbag
module may be hot for several minutes. For
location of the airbag modules, see What Makes
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help contain the head and chest of occupants
in the outboard seating positions in the first,
second, and third rows. The rollover capable
roof-rail airbags are designed to help reduce the
risk of full or partial ejection in rollover events,
although no system can prevent all such ejections.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There may be some smoke and dust coming from
the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation
does not prevent the driver from seeing out of the
windshield or being able to steer the vehicle,
nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the
airbag, windshields are broken by vehicle
deformation. Additional windshield breakage may
also occur from the right front passenger airbag.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there may be
dust in the air. This dust could cause
breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing
problems but cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door. If you
experience breathing problems following
an airbag deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
an airbag inflates, you will need some new
parts for the airbag system. If you do not get
them, the airbag system will not be there to help
protect you in another crash. A new system will
include airbag modules and possibly other
parts. The service manual for your vehicle
covers the need to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information
after a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording and
on page 520.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the
airbag systems. Improper service can mean
that an airbag system will not work properly.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and
turn the hazard warning flashers on when the
airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn the
interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warning
flashers off by using the controls for those features.
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags are not part of the
passenger sensing system.
Passenger Sensing System
Your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger’s position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when you start your vehicle.
The passenger sensing system works with
sensors that are part of the right front passenger’s
seat. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and
determine if the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer
if they are restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and
off, will be visible during the system check. If
you are using remote start to start your vehicle
from a distance, if equipped, you may not see the
system check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or the word OFF, or
the symbol for on or the symbol for off, will be
page 214.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because
the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the
airbag deploys.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
If you secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat as far back
as it will go. It is better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can
be seriously injured or killed if the right
front passenger’s airbag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag.
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbag if the system detects a
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that an
airbag will not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is turned off.
We recommend that rear-facing child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, even if
the airbags are off.
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is
present in a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is
present in a booster seat.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off
of the seat for a period of time.
CAUTION: (Continued)
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to
make sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not
pressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. If
this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s
seatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.
Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,
adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints
on page 17.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by
a smaller person, such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that
the airbags are off. See Passenger Airbag
Remove any additional material from the seat
cushion before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove
the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the
child restraint following the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing a
on page 72.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the
vehicle, and check with your dealer/retailer.
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system is designed to
enable (may inflate) the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of
adult size is sitting properly in the right front
passenger’s seat. When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags to be enabled, the
on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you
that the airbags are active.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it
could be because that person is not sitting properly
in the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle off
and ask the person to place the seatback in
the fully upright position, then sit upright in the
seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain in this position
for two to three minutes. This will allow the
system to detect that person and then enable the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
For some children who have outgrown child
restraints and for very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag, depending upon the person’s
seating posture and body build. Everyone in your
vehicle who has outgrown child restraints should
wear a safety belt properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something may
be wrong with the airbag system. If this
ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front passenger’s seat
may not have the protection of the
page 212 for more on this, including
important safety information.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position
on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking,
which helps the passenger sensing system
maintain the passenger airbag status. See “Safety
Belts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index for
additional information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a
blanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such
as seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers
can affect how well the passenger sensing system
operates. Remove any additional material from the
seat cushion before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint and before a small occupant,
including a small adult, sits in the right front
passenger’s seat. You may want to consider not
using seat covers or other aftermarket equipment.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
modifications that can affect how the system
operates.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are
close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are probably part
of the airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and make sure
the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat
cushion and seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several
places around your vehicle. You do not want the
system to inflate while someone is working on your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about servicing your vehicle and
the airbag system. To purchase a service manual,
page 518.
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get
my vehicle modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the
front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel,
instrument panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner, and pillar garnish trim, side
impact sensors, rollover sensor module,
or airbag wiring can affect the operation of the
airbag system. If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The phone numbers
and addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Q: Is there anything I might add to the
exterior of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your
vehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,
front end or side sheet metal, they may keep
the airbag system from working properly.
Also, the airbag system may not work properly
if you relocate any of the airbag sensors. If
you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Your dealer/retailer and the service manual have
information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and
airbag wiring.
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags,
page 442 for additional important information.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag System
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly
scheduled maintenance or replacement. Make
sure the airbag readiness light is working.
information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors, and anchorages are working properly.
for more information.
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged,
opened, or broken, the airbag may not work
properly. Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any opened or broken
airbag covers, have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the location of
the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag
for service.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt
system parts. If you see anything that might keep a
safety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry. See
information.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
Collision damage also may mean you will need to
have LATCH system, safety belt or seat parts
repaired or replaced. New parts and repairs may
be necessary even if the belt or LATCH system
was not being used at the time of the collision.
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system
earlier in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint
system may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in serious injury
or even death in a crash. To help make sure
your restraint systems are working
properly after a crash, have them inspected
and any necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
If any airbag inflates, you will also need to replace
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new
assembly will be there to help protect you in a
collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver
and front passenger’s safety belt assemblies,
even if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The
driver and front passenger’s safety belt
assemblies contain the safety belt pretensioners.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if
your vehicle has been in a collision, or if your
airbag readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle or while you are driving. See Airbag
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be
necessary. But if the belts were stretched, as they
would be if worn during a more severe crash, then
you need new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a
more severe crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate
the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The
windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in the path of a
closing window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One key is used for the ignition and all locks.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
When a new vehicle is delivered to the
dealer/retailer, the key has a key tag. This tag has
a bar-coded key code that tells your dealer/retailer
how to make extra keys. This tag may be
removed and kept by your dealer/retailer. If it has
not been removed, keep the tag in a safe
place. If you lose your key, your dealer/retailer can
easily make another one by using the key code.
more information.
Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your
vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle
to get in. Be sure you have spare keys.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
At times you may notice a decrease in operating
range. This is normal for any RKE system. If
the transmitter does not work or if you have to
stand closer to your vehicle for the transmitter to
work, try this:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer
during rainy or snowy weather.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps
to the left or right, hold the transmitter
higher, and try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement”
• If you are still having trouble, see your
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following functions may be available if your
vehicle has the RKE system:
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
/(Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle has
this feature, it may be started from outside
the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See
“Remote Vehicle Start” following for more detailed
information.
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
functions will work up to 195 feet (60 m) away.
However, the operating range may be less while
the vehicle is running.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote
Q(Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the
doors. If enabled through the Driver Information
Center (DIC), the parking lamps will flash once to
indicate locking has occurred. If enabled through
the DIC, the horn will chirp when the lock button is
pressed again within five seconds of the previous
press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle
additional information. Pressing the lock button
may arm the content theft-deterrent system.
" (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlock the
driver’s door. If the button is pressed again
within five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.
The interior lamps will come on and stay on for
20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.
If enabled through the DIC, the parking lamps will
flash once to indicate unlocking has occurred.
With Remote Start and
Liftgate (Without
Remote Start or Liftgate
Similar)
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
on the RKE transmitter will disarm the content
theft-deterrent system. See Content
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be
purchased through your dealer/retailer. Remember
to bring any additional transmitters so they can
also be re-coded to match the new transmitter.
Once your dealer/retailer has coded the new
transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock your
vehicle. The vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it. See “Relearn
Remote Key” under DIC Operation and Displays
and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 235
for instructions on how to match RKE transmitters
to your vehicle.
& (Power Liftgate): Press and hold this button
on the RKE transmitter to open and close the
liftgate. The taillamps will flash and a chime will
sound to indicate when the liftgate is opening and
closing.
L(Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release this button to locate your vehicle. The turn
signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound
three times. Press and hold this button for more
than two seconds to activate the panic alarm. The
turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will
sound repeatedly for 30 seconds. The alarm will
turn off when the ignition is moved to ON or
the alarm button is pressed again. The ignition
must be in OFF for the panic alarm to work.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in the RKE
transmitter should last about four years.
The battery is weak if the transmitter will not work
at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery.
The REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
message in the vehicle’s DIC will display if the
RKE transmitter battery is low. See “REPLACE
BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Warnings
information.
To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter do
the following:
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care
not to touch any of the circuitry. Static
from your body transferred to these surfaces
may damage the transmitter.
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the
notch on the side of the transmitter and
separate the bottom half from the top half.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a
metal object to do this.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with
the positive side of the battery facing down.
Use a type CR2032 battery, or equivalent
type. Make sure the cover is on tightly,
so water will not get in.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together.
During a remote start, if your vehicle has an
automatic climate control system and heated
seats, the heated seats will turn on during colder
outside temperatures and will shut off when
the key is turned to RUN. If your vehicle does not
have an automatic climate control system,
during remote start, you will need to manually turn
the heated seats on and off. See Heated Seats
for additional information
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
Remote Vehicle Start
Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature.
This feature allows you to start the engine
from outside of the vehicle. It may also start up
the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems
and rear window defogger. Normal operation of the
system will return after the key is turned to the
ON position.
Laws in some communities may restrict the use of
remote starters. For example, some laws may
require a person using the remote start to have the
vehicle in view when doing so. Check local
regulations for any requirements on remote starting
of vehicles.
If your vehicle has an automatic climate control
system, during remote start, the climate control
system will default to a heating mode during colder
outside temperatures and a cooling mode during
warmer outside temperatures. If your vehicle
does not have an automatic climate control
system, during remote start, the climate control
system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was
set to when the vehicle was last turned off.
The RKE transmitter with the remote start button,
provides an increased range of operation. However,
the range may be less while the vehicle is running.
As a result, you may need to be closer to your
vehicle to turn it off, than you were to turn it on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter, see Remote
additional information.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the vehicle is left running it will automatically
shut off after 10 minutes unless a time extension
has been done.
/(Remote Start): This button will be on the
RKE transmitter if you have remote start.
To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,
do the following:
To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the
following:
1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.
• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and
press the remote start button until the
parking lamps turn off.
2. Press and release the transmitter’s lock
button, then immediately press and hold
the transmitter’s remote start button until the
turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see
the vehicle’s lights, press and hold the remote
start button for at least four seconds. The
vehicle’s doors will lock. Pressing the remote
start button again, after the vehicle has
started, will turn off the ignition.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Turn the ignition switch on and then off.
The vehicle can be remote started two separate
times between driving sequences. The engine will
run for 10 minutes after each remote start.
Or, you can extend the engine run time by another
10 minutes within the first 10 minute remote
start time frame, and before the engine stops.
When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will
turn on and remain on while the vehicle is
running.
For example, if the lock button and then the
remote start buttons are pressed again after the
vehicle has been running for five minutes,
10 minutes are added, allowing the engine to run
for 15 minutes.
3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle
has been driven, repeat these steps while the
engine is still running, to extend the time
by 10 minutes for the engine to continue to
run. Remote start can be extended one time.
The additional 10 minutes are considered a
second remote vehicle start.
After entering the vehicle during a remote start,
insert and turn the key to the ON position to drive
the vehicle.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once two remote starts, or a single remote start
with one time extension has been done, the
vehicle must be started with the key.
your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see
your dealer/retailer to enable or disable the remote
vehicle start system.
After the key is removed from the ignition, the
vehicle can be remote started again.
Remote Start Ready
The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is
in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if
there is an emission control system malfunction.
If your vehicle does not have the remote vehicle
start feature, it will have the remote start ready
feature. This feature allows your dealer/retailer to
add the manufacturer’s remote vehicle start
feature.
Also, the engine will turn off during a remote
vehicle start if the coolant temperature gets too
high or if the oil pressure gets low.
Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start feature
are shipped from the factory with the remote
vehicle start system enabled. The system may be
enabled or disabled through the DIC if your
vehicle has DIC buttons. See “REMOTE START”
See your dealer/retailer if you would like to add
the manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature to
your vehicle.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doors and Locks
CAUTION: (Continued)
Door Locks
heat and can suffer permanent injuries or
even death from heat stroke. Always lock
your vehicle whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down
or stop your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this from
happening.
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is
locked, the handle will not open it.
You increase the chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear
safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A
child can be overcome by extreme
The vehicle’s doors can be manually locked or
unlocked in the following ways:
• From the outside, use the key in the
driver’s door.
• From the inside, use the lock control on
the door.
CAUTION: (Continued)
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the
ignition.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switches are located on the
armrest on the front doors.
You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR
LOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC
K(Unlock): Press the side of the switch with the
unlock symbol to unlock the doors.
Q(Lock): Press the side of the switch with the
Programmable Automatic Door
Locks
lock symbol to lock the doors.
Delayed Locking
Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlock feature
enable you to program the vehicle’s power
door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
on page 250 for more information on DIC
programming.
When locking the doors with the power lock switch
and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will
lock five seconds after the last door is closed. You
will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed
locking feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock
button on the RKE transmitter twice will override
the delayed locking feature and immediately
lock all the doors.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the locks, do the following:
Rear Door Security Locks
1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and
turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.
Your vehicle has rear door security locks. These
prevent passengers from opening the rear
doors from the inside.
2. Close the door.
When you want to open a rear door when the
security lock is on, do the following:
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You
must open the rear
doors to access them.
The label showing
lock and unlock
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless
entry transmitter, if the vehicle has one, the
power door lock switch, or by lifting the
rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the
following:
positions is located near
the lock.
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the security lock slot
Lock Label shown
and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking the key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front
door is open.
If the driver’s side power door lock switch is
pressed when the driver’s door is open and the key
is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then
the driver’s door will unlock.
If the passenger’s side power door lock switch is
pressed when the front passenger’s door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will
lock and then the front passenger’s door will unlock.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you must drive with the liftgate open, or
if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or
cooling system to its highest speed
with the recirculation mode off. That
will force outside air into your vehicle.
page 194.
Liftgate
• If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them all
the way.
• If your vehicle has a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to drive with the
liftgate open because carbon monoxide
(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You
cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If your vehicle has a power liftgate, see Power
CAUTION: (Continued)
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To unlock the liftgate, use the power door lock
switch or press the door unlock button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice.
Power Liftgate
Power Liftgate Operation
{CAUTION:
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the
underside of the liftgate handle. The vehicle must
be in PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To close
the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid.
It can be dangerous to drive with the
liftgate open because carbon monoxide
(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You
cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is
disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate
will not open. The liftgate will resume operation
when the battery is reconnected and charged.
If you must drive with the liftgate open, or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must pass through the seal between the
body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See
If the battery is properly connected and has
adequate voltage, and the liftgate still will not
function, your vehicle should be taken to a
dealership for service.
CAUTION: (Continued)
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
• If you have air outlets on or under
the instrument panel, open them all
the way.
• If your vehicle has a power liftgate,
disable the power liftgate function.
You or others could be injured if caught in
the path of the power liftgate. Make sure
there is no one in the way of the liftgate
as it is opening and closing.
Notice: If you open the liftgate without
checking for overhead obstructions such as a
garage door, you could damage the liftgate
or the liftgate glass. Always check to make
sure the area above and behind the liftgate is
clear before opening it.
Your vehicle may have a power liftgate. The
vehicle must be in PARK (P) to use the power
feature.
The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound
when the power liftgate is used.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The power liftgate can be power opened and
closed in the following ways:
Pressing the buttons, or touchpad switch a
second time while the liftgate is moving reverses
the direction.
• Press and hold the power liftgate button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
until the liftgate starts moving. Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 100
for more information.
Power Liftgate Button Near Liftgate Latch
Power Liftgate Button
on Center Console
The liftgate can also be closed by pressing the
power liftgate button next to the liftgate latch.
Press the button a second time during liftgate
operation to reverse that operation.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the center
console.
The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled
under extreme temperatures, or under low battery
conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate can still be
operated manually.
• Pressing the touchpad switch on the outside
liftgate handle.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while
the power function is in progress, the liftgate
power function will continue to completion. If you
shift the transmission out of PARK (P) and
accelerate before the power liftgate latches closed,
the liftgate may reverse to the open position.
Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always make
sure the power liftgate is closed and latched before
you drive away.
encounters multiple obstacles on the same power
cycle, the power function will deactivate, and
you must manually open or close the liftgate. The
LIFTGATE OPEN warning message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will indicate that
the liftgate is open. After removing the
obstructions, manually open the liftgate to the full
open position or close the liftgate to the fully
closed and latched position. The liftgate will now
resume normal power operation.
If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate
support struts have lost pressure, the lights will
flash and a chime will sound. The liftgate will stay
open temporarily, then slowly close. See your
dealer/retailer for service before using the liftgate.
Your vehicle has pinch sensors located on the
side edges of the liftgate. If an object is caught
between the liftgate and the body and presses
against this sensor, the liftgate will reverse
direction and open fully. The liftgate will remain
open until it is activated again or closed manually.
Do not force the liftgate open or closed during
a power cycle.
Obstacle Detection Features
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle during a
power open or close cycle, a warning chime will
sound and the liftgate will automatically reverse
direction to the full closed or open position.
After removing the obstruction, the power liftgate
operation can be used again. If the liftgate
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the RKE button or the power close button on the
liftgate is pressed while power operation is
disabled, the lights will flash three times, but the
liftgate will not move.
Manual Operation of Power Liftgate
To change the liftgate to
manual operation, press
the switch on the
center console to the
OFF position.
It is not recommended that you drive with the
liftgate open, however, if you must drive with the
liftgate open, the liftgate should be set to
manual operation by pressing the OFF switch on
the center console.
The liftgate has an electric latch. If the battery is
disconnected or has low voltage, the liftgate
will not open. The liftgate will resume operation
when the battery is reconnected and charged.
With the power liftgate disabled and all of the
doors unlocked, the liftgate can be manually
opened and closed.
If the battery is properly connected with adequate
voltage, the switch is not disabled, and the
liftgate still will not function, your vehicle should be
taken to a dealer/retailer for service.
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the
handle on the outside of the liftgate, and lift
the gate open. To close the liftgate, use the pull
cup to lower the liftgate and close. The liftgate
latch will power close. Always close the liftgate
before driving.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome by the
extreme heat and suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a
pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot weather.
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Power Windows
CAUTION: (Continued)
and they could be seriously injured or
killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle
with children.
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets
in a vehicle with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be overcome from
extreme heat in warm or hot weather and
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke.
When there are children in the rear seat
use the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many
The power window
controls are located on
each of the side doors.
reasons, children or others could be badly
injured or even killed. They could operate
the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The windows
will function with the keys in the ignition
CAUTION: (Continued)
Driver’s Side shown
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The driver’s door also has switches that control
the passenger and rear windows. The power
windows work when the ignition has been turned
to ACCESSORY or ON or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active. See Retained
Programming the Power Windows
If the battery one your vehicle has been recharged,
disconnected, or replaced, windows with the
express-up feature need to be reprogrammed for
this feature to work. To program the window:
1. With the ignition in the ACCESSORY or RUN
positions, or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active, close all doors. See
page 125.
Press the switch to lower the window.
Pull up on the front edge of the switch to raise the
window.
Express-Down Windows
2. Press and continue to hold the window switch
until the window is fully open.
Windows that have the express-down feature
allow the windows to be lowered without holding
the switch. Press the window switch fully and
release it to activate the express-down feature.
The express mode can be cancelled at any time by
briefly pressing, or pulling the switch.
3. Pull up and hold the window switch to close
the window. Continue to hold it briefly after
the window is fully closed.
4. Repeat for each window that has the express
up feature.
Express-Up Window
Windows that have the express-up feature allow
the windows to be raised all the way without
holding the switch up. Pull the switch up fully and
release it to activate the express-up feature.
The express-up mode can be canceled at any time
by briefly pressing, or pulling the switch.
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Pinch Feature
Sun Visors
The anti-pinch feature is on windows with the
express-up feature. If an object is in the way of the
window as it is express-closing, or in certain
weather conditions like severe icing, the window
will stop and open to a factory preset position. The
window functions normally once the obstruction
is removed.
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the
sun visor from the center mount and slide it
along the rod from side-to-side to cover the driver
or passenger side of the front window. Swing
the sun visor to the side to cover the side window.
It can be moved along the rod from side-to-side
in this position also.
Window Lockout
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on
both the driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pull
the sun visor down and lift the mirror cover to
turn the lamps on.
o(Window Lockout): The window lockout
switch is located with the power window switches
on the driver’s door armrest. This feature
prevents the rear passenger windows from
operating, except from the driver’s position. Press
the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off.
An indicator light will come on to show the lockout
feature is on.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
after approximately 30 seconds. The content
theft deterrent alarm is not armed until the
security light goes off.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some
cities. Although your vehicle has a number of
theft-deterrent features, we know that nothing we
put on it can make it impossible to steal.
If the delayed locking feature is active, the
alarm will not be activated until all doors are
closed and the security light goes off.
• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter
when the driver door is closed.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
The security light will come on solid for
approximately 30 seconds and then go off. The
content theft deterrent alarm is not armed until
the security light goes off.
If a locked door is opened without using the key
in the driver’s door key cylinder or the RKE
transmitter, a ten second pre-alarm will occur. The
horn will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is
not placed in the ignition and turned to START or
the door is not unlocked by pressing the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter during the
ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Your
vehicle’s headlamps will flash and the horn will
sound for about two minutes, then will turn off to
save the battery power.
To activate the theft-deterrent system, do one of
the following:
• Press the lock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter when any door is open.
The security light should come on and flash.
When the door is closed, the security light will
stop flashing and stay on solid and then go off
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the
doors are locked with the vehicle’s key or the
manual door lock. It activates only if you use the
power door lock switch with the door open or
the RKE transmitter. You should also remember
that you can start your vehicle with the correct
ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s
window and open the driver’s door.
2. Activate the system by locking the doors with
the RKE transmitter.
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by
accident:
3. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and wait
for the security light to go out.
• If you do not want to activate the
theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should be
locked with the door key after the doors
are closed.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the
door with the manual door lock and open the
door. This should set off the alarm.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, but
the vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the
horn works. The horn fuse may be blown. To
replace the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 476.
• Always unlock a door with the RKE transmitter.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the
alarm if the system has been armed.
If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the
alarm by pressing unlock on the RKE transmitter or
by placing the key in the ignition and turning it
to START.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s
headlamps do not flash, see your dealer/retailer
for service.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency
transponder in the key that matches a decoder in
your vehicle.
PASS-Key® III+
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry
Canada.
PASS-Key® III+ Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent
system. PASS-Key® III+ is a passive
theft-deterrent system. This means you do not
have to do anything special to arm or disarm the
system. It works when you insert or remove
the key from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that
someone is using the wrong key, it prevents the
vehicle from starting. Anyone using a
trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of
electrical key codes.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does
not start and the security light on the instrument
panel cluster comes on, the key may have a
damaged transponder. Turn the ignition off and
try again.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the engine still does not start, and the key
appears to be not damaged, try another ignition
key. At this time, you may also want to check the
If the engine still does not start with the other key,
your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does
start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/
retailer who can service the PASS-Key® III+ to have
a new key made. In an emergency, contact
Roadside Assistance. See Roadside Assistance
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to
“learn” the transponder value of a new or
replacement key. Up to 10 keys may be
programmed for the vehicle. The following
procedure is for programming additional keys only.
If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do
not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to have
keys made and programmed to the system.
To program the new key:
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped
on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the
ignition and start the engine. If the engine
will not start, see your dealer/retailer for
service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
OFF, and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to
the ON position within five seconds of the
original key being turned to the OFF position.
The security light will turn off once the key
has been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys
are to be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security light comes
on and stays on, you may be able to restart your
engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+
system, however, is not working properly and must
be serviced by your dealer/retailer. Your vehicle
is not protected by the PASS-Key® III+ system at
this time.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that
is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates
the system.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,
see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can
service PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed,
fast or slow, for the first 500 miles
(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.
Avoid downshifting to brake, or slow,
the vehicle.
The SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
message displays on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) when there is a problem with the
theft-deterrent system. See DIC Warnings and
• Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time
the new brake linings are not yet broken in.
Hard stops with new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every time
you get new brake linings.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the
vehicle.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See
towing capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Following break-in, engine speed and load can
be gradually increased.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an
elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in
the long run if you follow these guidelines:
• If you have all-wheel drive, keep your
speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
B (ACCESSORY): This position allows you to use
things like the radio and the windshield wipers
while the engine is off. This position will also allow
you to turn off the engine. Use ACCESSORY if
you must have your vehicle in motion while
the engine is off, for example, if your vehicle is
being pushed or towed.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the
ignition, you can turn it
to four different
positions.
C (ON): This is the position that the switch
returns to after you start your engine and release
the key. The switch stays in ON when the
engine is running. But even when the engine is
not running, you can use ON to operate your
electrical power accessories, and to display some
instrument panel warning lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ACCESSORY or ON position with the
engine off. You may not be able to start your
vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for
an extended period of time.
A (OFF): This is the only position in which you
can remove the key. This position locks the ignition
and transmission.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break
the key. Use the correct key and turn the key
only with your hand. Make sure the key is all the
way in. If none of this works, then your vehicle
needs service.
D (START): This position starts the engine. When
the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch will return to ON for normal driving.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Key In the Ignition
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it
is an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you
leave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,
a chime will sound when you open the driver’s
door. Always remember to remove your key from
the ignition and take it with you. This will lock
your ignition and transmission. Also, always
remember to lock the doors.
These vehicle accessories can be used for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off:
• Audio System
• Power Windows
• Sunroof (if equipped)
Power to the windows and sunroof will work up to
10 minutes or until a door is opened.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key
in the ignition while your vehicle is parked.
You may not be able to start your vehicle after it
has been parked for an extended period of time.
The radio continues to work for 10 minutes or until
the driver’s door is opened.
For an additional 10 minutes of operation, close all
the doors and turn the key to ON and then back
to OFF.
All these features will work when the key is in the
ON or ACCESSORY positions.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled
Cranking System. This feature assists
in starting the engine and protects
Starting the Engine
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
components. If the ignition key is turned to the
START position, and then released when
the engine begins cranking, the engine
will continue cranking for a few seconds or
until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not
start and the key is held in START for
many seconds, cranking will be stopped after
15 seconds to prevent cranking motor
damage. To prevent gear damage, this system
also prevents cranking if the engine is
already running. Engine cranking can be
stopped by turning the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY or OFF position.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start in
any other position – this is a safety feature. To
restart when you are already moving, use
NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could
damage the transmission. Shift to PARK (P)
only when your vehicle is stopped.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go
down as your engine gets warm. Do not
race the engine immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and transmission gently to
allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods
of time, by returning the key to the START
position immediately after cranking has ended,
can overheat and damage the cranking
motor, and drain the battery. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with too much
gasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and holding it there as
you hold the key in START for up to a
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,
the engine coolant heater can help. You will get
easier starting and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up.
maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the
cranking motor to cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and accelerator. If
the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
do the same thing. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not race the
engine immediately after starting it. Operate
the engine and transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your
vehicle. At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of
the coolant heater is not required. Your vehicle
may also have an internal thermostat in the
plug end of the cord. This will prevent operation of
the engine coolant heater when the temperature
is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with
the electronics in your vehicle. If you add
electrical parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine operates. Before
adding electrical equipment, check with
your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your
vehicle’s warranty.
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug
and store the cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. If you do
not, it could be damaged.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical
cord. The cord is located on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment, it is routed
around the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
How long should you keep the coolant heater
plugged in? The answer depends on the outside
temperature, the kind of oil you have, and
some other things. Instead of trying to list
everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer/retailer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you
the best advice for that particular area.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt
AC outlet.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded
outlet could cause an electrical shock.
Also, the wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug the cord
into a properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not
reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle has an electronic shift position
indicator within the instrument panel cluster.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)
with the parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not
move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking brake
and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See
are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 362.
When using the Electronic Range Select Mode a
number will display next to the L, indicating
the current gear that has been selected.
See Electronic Range Select mode in this section
for more information.
Your automatic transmission has a shift lever
located on the console between the seats.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start
your engine because your vehicle cannot move
easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)
before starting the engine. Your vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock control system.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You must fully apply your regular brake first and
then press the shift lever button before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in
ON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease
pressure on the shift lever, then push the
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does
not connect with the wheels. To restart when
you are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is
being towed.
shift lever all the way into PARK (P) as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift
lever button and move the shift lever into another
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed is dangerous.
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal, your vehicle could move very
rapidly. You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift into a drive
gear while your engine is running at high
speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your
vehicle is moving forward could damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Shift to
REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your
transmission, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) with the engine running at high
speed may damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Be sure the engine is not running at high
speed when shifting your vehicle.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. It
provides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. If
you need more power for passing, and you are:
To use this feature, do the following:
1. Move the shift lever to LOW (L).
2. Press the plus/minus
• Going less than 35 mph (56 km/h), push
your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
button located on the
shift lever, to
increase or decrease
the gear range
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
available based
upon your current
driving conditions
and needs.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to accelerate
slowly or not shift gears when you go faster,
and you continue to drive your vehicle that
way, you could damage the transmission. Have
your vehicle serviced right away. You can
drive in LOW (L) when you are driving less than
35 mph (56 km/h) and DRIVE (D) for higher
speeds until then.
When you shift from DRIVE (D) to LOW (L), the
transmission will shift to a pre-determined
lower gear range. The highest gear available for
this pre-determined range is displayed next to
the L in the DIC. See Driver Information Center
on page 235 for more information. The number
displayed in the DIC is the highest gear that
the transmission will be allowed to operate in.
LOW (L): This position gives you access to gear
ranges. This provides more engine braking but
lower fuel economy than DRIVE (D). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.
Electronic Range Select Mode
Electronic Range Selector (ERS) mode allows you
to choose the top-gear limit of the vehicle’s
transmission and the vehicle’s speed while driving
down hill or towing a trailer.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, your vehicle can automatically shift to
lower gears as required by various driving
conditions. This means that all gears below that
number are available. For example, when
FOURTH (4) is shown next to the L, FIRST (1)
through FOURTH (4) gears are automatically
shifted by the vehicle. You cannot shift into
FIFTH (5) until the plus (+) button is used or you
shift back into DRIVE (D) mode.
Tow/Haul Mode
Your vehicle may have a Tow/Haul mode.
The button to turn it on
or off is located on
instrument panel under
the climate controls.
While in LOW (L), the transmission will prevent
shifting to a lower gear range if the engine speed
is too high for the gear range you are trying to
select. You have a brief period of time to slow the
vehicle speed. If vehicle speed is not reduced
within the timeframe allowed, the lower gear range
attempted will not be available. The highest
possible gear that is allowed for that engine speed
will display next to the L in the DIC. Try again
to slow the vehicle speed and press the minus (−)
button to the desired lower gear range.
Push the button to turn it on, push it again to
deactivate the system. You can use this feature to
assist when towing or hauling a heavy load.
When Tow/Haul is activated the Tow/Haul symbol
will come on the instrument panel cluster. See
page 362 for more information.
Automatic Engine Grade braking is not available
when the ERS is active. It is available in
DRIVE (D) for both normal and Tow/Haul mode.
While using the ERS, cruise control and the
tow/haul mode can be used. See Tow/Haul Mode
on page 132 for more information.
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Engine Grade Braking
Parking Brake
Automatic Engine Grade Braking assists when
driving on a downhill grade. It maintains the
vehicle’s speed by automatically implementing a
shift schedule that uses the engine and the
transmission to slow the vehicle. This reduces
wear on the brakes system and increases control
of the vehicle. The system constantly monitors
the vehicle’s speed, acceleration, throttle position,
and whether the brake pedal is being pressed,
and determines when to keep the current vehicle
speed or to slow down. The system will then
automatically command downshifts that reduces
the vehicle’s speed, until the brake pedal is
no longer being pressed. This indicates the desired
vehicle speed has been reached.
To set the parking
brake, push down the
parking brake pedal
down with your left foot.
If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will come on. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 217.
While in the Electronic Range Select (ERS) mode,
grade braking is deactivated, allowing the driver
to select a range and limiting the highest gear
available. Grade braking is available for normal
driving and in Tow/Haul mode.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause
premature wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning light is off
before driving.
page 129.
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular
brake pedal down with your right foot. Push down
momentarily on the parking brake pedal with
your left foot until you feel the pedal release, then
slowly pull your foot up off the park brake
pedal. If the parking brake is not released when
you begin to drive, the brake system warning light
will be on and a chime will sound warning you
that the parking brake is still on.
CAUTION: (Continued)
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. If you are
page 362.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill,
Shifting Into Park (P)
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding
in the button on the shift lever and pushing
the shift lever all the way toward the front
of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. If you have left
3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
CAUTION: (Continued)
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking
pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to
pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called
“torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the
parking brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly
before you leave the driver’s seat. To find out how,
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle could
move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully
in PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. And, if you leave the vehicle with the
engine running, it could overheat and even
catch fire. You or others could be injured.
Do not leave your vehicle with the engine
running.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever
out of PARK (P) before you release the parking
brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push your vehicle a little uphill
to take some of the pressure from the parking pawl
in the transmission, then you will be able to pull
the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and
your parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.
After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),
hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you
can move the shift lever away from PARK (P)
without first pushing the button.
If you can, it means that the shift lever was not fully
locked in PARK (P).
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift
lock control system. You have to apply your
regular brake first and then press the shift lever
button before you can shift from PARK (P).
page 129.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot
exhaust parts under your vehicle and
ignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,
dry grass, or other things that can burn.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever and push the shift lever all the
way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and
move the shift lever into the gear you wish.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION: (Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged when
driving over high points on the road
or over road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system
has been modified improperly.
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the
gas carbon monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows
down to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• The exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a
collision.
CAUTION: (Continued)
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly
set. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine is running
unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and move
the shift lever to PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) into your
vehicle even if the climate control fan is at
the highest setting. One place this can
happen is a garage. Exhaust — with
CO — can come in easily. NEVER park in
a garage with the engine running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
page 134.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
page 362.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming
rearview mirror with a compass.
There may be three additional buttons for the
OnStar® system. See your dealer/retailer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe
more information about the services OnStar®
provides.
When you are sitting in a comfortable driving
position, adjust the mirror so you can see clearly
behind your vehicle. Hold the mirror in the
center to move it up or down and side to side. The
day/night adjustment allows you to adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the lamps behind you.
Move the lever to the right for nighttime use and to
the left for daytime use.
O (On/Off): This is the on/off button.
There may also be three OnStar® buttons located
at the bottom of the mirror face. See your
dealer/retailer for more information on the system
the services OnStar® provides.
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
The automatic dimming mirror comes on each time
the ignition is turned to start. To turn the
automatic dimming feature off or back on, press
the on/off button. The indicator light on the mirror is
lit when the automatic dimming feature is on.
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compass Operation
Compass Variance
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
Compass variance is the difference between
earth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.
The mirror is set to zone eight upon leaving
the factory. It will be necessary to adjust the
compass to compensate for compass variance if
you live outside zone eight. Under certain
circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account
for compass variance, your compass could give
false readings.
There is a compass display in the window in the
upper right corner of the mirror face.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button to activate the
compass calibration mode. CAL will be displayed
in the compass window on the mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the
vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
If after a few seconds the display does not show a
compass direction, (N for North for example),
there may be a strong magnetic field interfering
with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic antenna mount, note pad
holder, or similar object. If the letter C or CAL
appears in the compass window, the compass may
need to be reset or calibrated.
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust for compass variance:
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in
the window on the mirror by pressing the on/off
button. Once you find your zone number,
release the button. After about four seconds,
the mirror will return to the compass display,
and the new zone number will be set. If C or
CAL appears in the compass window, the
compass may need calibration. See “Compass
Calibration” listed previously.
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until the zone
number is displayed. The number shown is
the current zone number.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to
prevent damage when going through an automatic
car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the
vehicle. To return the mirror to its original position,
push outward. Be sure to return both mirrors to
their original unfolded position before driving.
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle is
equipped with outside
power mirrors, the
controls are located on
the driver’s door
armrest.
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and
add-on convex mirror attachments may adversely
affect mirror performance.
Turn Signal Indicator
Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on
the mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash in
the direction of the turn or lane change.
Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror or (B) to
select the passenger’s side mirror. Press either
(A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror.
To adjust each mirror, press one of the four
arrows located on the control pad to move the
mirror in the direction you want it to go. Adjust
each outside mirror so that you can see a little of
your vehicle, and the area behind your vehicle.
information.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded
manually, they may shake or flutter at normal
driving speeds and may not stay in the unfolded
position. If this happens, you will need to reset the
mirrors. See “Resetting the Power Foldaway
Mirrors” next.
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
If your vehicle is
equipped with outside
power foldaway mirrors,
the controls are
located on the driver’s
door armrest.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors
if the following occurs:
• The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while
folding.
• They are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
• Press (A) to select the driver’s side mirror. Then
press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (A) again
to deselect the mirror.
• Press (B) to select the passenger’s side mirror.
Then press the arrows located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror. Press (B) again
to deselect the mirror.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded
position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal driving
speeds.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and
unfold them one time using the mirror controls.
This will reset them to their normal position.
• Press (C), to fold the mirrors out to the driving
position.
This mirror has the following features.
• Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded
position.
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Dimming
Turn Signal Indicator
The driver’s outside mirror will adjust for the glare
of the headlamps behind you. See Automatic
Your vehicle may have a turn signal indicator on
the mirror. An arrow on the mirror will flash in
the direction of the turn or lane change.
Outside Convex Mirror
Curb View Assist
If your vehicle has the memory package, the
outside mirrors are able to perform the curb view
assist mirror function. This feature may be
useful in allowing the driver to view the curb when
parallel parking. This feature will cause the
passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a
preselected position when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R).
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like
other vehicles) look farther away than
they really are. If you cut too sharply into
the right lane, you could hit a vehicle on
your right. Check your inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will return
to its original position when the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE (R), or the ignition is
turned off or to LOCK.
The passenger’s side mirror may have convex
glass. A convex mirror’s surface is curved so more
can be seen from the driver’s seat.
This feature can be turned on or off through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
services be sent to your location. If you lock
your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to
unlock your doors. If you need roadside assistance,
press the OnStar® button and they can contact
Roadside Service for you.
OnStar® service is provided to you subject to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may
cancel your OnStar® service at any time by
contacting OnStar®. A complete OnStar® Owner’s
Guide and the OnStar® Terms and Conditions
are included in the vehicle’s OnStar® Subscriber
glove box literature. For more information,
visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® button to
speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a
day, 7 days a week.
Outside Heated Mirrors
Press the rear window defogger button, located on
the climate control panel, to also turn the outside
heated mirrors on or off. The mirrors will heat
to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the
mirror.
See “Rear Window Defogger” under Dual
Automatic Climate Control System on page 198
for more information.
OnStar® System
Not all OnStar® features are available on all
vehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped to
provide the services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar® services and system
limitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in your
glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar® uses several innovative technologies and
live advisors to provide you with a wide range of
safety, security, information, and convenience
services. If your airbags deploy, the system is
designed to make an automatic call to OnStar®
Emergency advisors who can request emergency
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® Services
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics
For new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & Sound
Plan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan is
included for one year from the date of purchase.
You can extend this plan beyond the first year,
or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.
For more information, press the OnStar® button
to speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services
(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle
Location Assistance) may not be available
until you register with OnStar®.
• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics
• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with Directions
& Connections® Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or
OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
Available Services with Safe &
Sound® Plan
• RideAssist
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling
OnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligible
OnStar® subscribers to make and receive calls
using voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully
integrated into the vehicle, and can be used
with OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification
(AACN) (If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to a
Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on
eligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®
Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
www.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak with
an OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®
button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the
button for a few seconds and give the command
“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling feature.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial
phone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’s
Guide for more information.
How OnStar® Service Works
(1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
In order to provide you with OnStar® services,
your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an
OnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®
button press, Emergency button press or if
your airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicle
information usually includes your GPS location
and, in the event of a crash, additional information
regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which
your vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual
Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,
your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPS
location so that we can provide you with
location-based services.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to
access location-based weather, local traffic reports,
and stock quotes. By pressing the phone button
and giving a few simple voice commands, you can
browse through the various topics. See the OnStar®
Owner’s Guide for more information (Only available
in the continental U.S.).
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that
can be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-Free
page 317 for more information.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicle
is in a place where OnStar® has an agreement
with a wireless service provider for service in that
area. OnStar® service also cannot work unless
you are in a place where the wireless service
provider OnStar® has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception
when the service is needed, and technology that
is compatible with the OnStar® service. Not all
services are available everywhere, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas, or at all times.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system (including adequate battery power) for the
OnStar® equipment to operate. There are other
problems OnStar® cannot control that may prevent
OnStar® from providing OnStar® service to you
at any particular time or place. Some examples are
damage to important parts of your vehicle in an
accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network congestion.
Your Responsibility
OnStar® service that involves location information
about your vehicle cannot work unless GPS
satellite signals are unobstructed and available in
that place as well.
You may need to increase the volume of your
radio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light next
to the OnStar® buttons is red, this means that
your system is not functioning properly and should
be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the light
appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®
subscription has expired. You can always press
the OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®
equipment is active.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Universal Home Remote
System
System Identification
Your vehicle may have a Universal Home Remote
System.
If there are three round LED indicator lights above
the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
instructions under Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED).
Determine which Universal Home Remote your
vehicle has and then read the pages following for
instructions on programming your specific
system.
For help or information on the Universal Home
Remote System, call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer Assistance Offices
on page 508.
Universal Home Remote System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a
way to replace up to three hand-held
Radio-Frequency (RF) transmitters used to
activate devices such as garage door openers,
security systems, and home lighting.
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator light above the Universal Home
Remote buttons, follow the instructions under
Universal Home Remote System Operation
(With One Triangular LED).
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode
(LED) indicator light above the Universal Home
Remote buttons, follow the instructions below.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop
and reverse feature. This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. If
you have a newer garage door opener with rolling
codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8 to
complete the programming of your Universal Home
Remote Transmitter.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the Universal Home Remote.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to
have another person available to assist you in
the programming steps
Programming the Universal Home
Remote System
To program up to three devices:
1. Press and hold down the two outside
Universal Home Remote buttons, releasing
only when the Universal Home Remote
indicator light begins to flash, after
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal
Home Remote programming. It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed Universal Home Remote buttons
should be erased for security purposes. See
“Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later in
section.
20 seconds. Do not hold down the buttons for
longer than 30 seconds and do not repeat
this step to program a second and/or
third hand-held transmitter to the remaining
two Universal Home Remote buttons.
2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from
the Universal Home Remote buttons
When programming a garage door, it is advised to
park outside of the garage. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or
gate operator you are programming.
while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. At the same time, press and hold both the
desired Universal Home Remote button and
the hand-held transmitter button. Do not
release the buttons until Step 4 has been
completed.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and
more accurate transmission of the radio-frequency
signal.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with
the procedure noted in “Gate Operator and
Canadian Programming” later in this section.
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and
then rapidly after Universal Home Remote
successfully receives the frequency signal
from the hand-held transmitter. Release both
buttons.
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be
found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal
Home Remote button and observe the
indicator light.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
programming is complete and your device
should activate when the Universal Home
Remote button is pressed and released.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold
the programmed Universal Home Remote
button for two seconds, then release it.
Immediately press and hold the same button
a second time for two seconds, then
release it. Immediately, press and hold the
same button a third time for two seconds, then
release.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do
not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of
the programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant
light, continue with Steps 6 through 8 following
to complete the programming of a rolling-code
device, most commonly, a garage door
opener.
The Universal Home Remote should now
activate the rolling-code device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home
Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 of
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do not
repeat Step 1, as this will erase all previous
programming from the Universal Home Remote
buttons.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home
Remote button for at least half of a second.
The indicator light will come on while the signal is
being transmitted.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds
of transmission. This may not be long enough
for Universal Home Remote to pick up the signal
during programming. Similarly, some U.S. gate
operators are manufactured to time out in
the same manner.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal
Home Remote buttons:
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door
opener by using the “Programming Universal
Home Remote” procedures, regardless of where
you live, replace Step 3 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” with the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons
until the indicator light begins to flash, after
20 seconds. Do not hold the two outside
buttons for longer than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home
Remote button while you press and release every
two seconds (cycle) the hand-held transmitter
button until the frequency signal has been
successfully accepted by the Universal Home
Remote. The Universal Home Remote indicator
light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” to complete.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the training
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with Step 2 under “Programming
Universal Home Remote” shown earlier in this
section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can
be reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a
Single Universal Home Remote Button” following
this section.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With Three Round LED)
To program a device to Universal Home Remote
using a Universal Home Remote button
previously trained:
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote button, proceed with Step
2 under “Programming Universal Home
Remote” shown earlier in this section.
Your vehicle may have the Universal Home
Remote System. If there are three round Light
Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above
the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the
instructions below.
For help or information on the Universal Home
Remote System, call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer Assistance Offices
on page 508.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate
devices such as garage door openers, security
systems, and home automation devices.
Do not use this system with any garage door
opener that does not have the stop and reverse
feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read the instructions completely before attempting
to program the transmitter. Because of the steps
involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in programming the
transmitter.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these
actions, the device will time out and you will have
to repeat the procedure.
Be sure to keep the original remote control
transmitter for use in other vehicles, as well as, for
future programming. You only need the original
remote control transmitter for Fixed Code
programming. It is also recommended that upon
the sale or lease termination of the vehicle,
the programmed buttons should be erased for
security purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home
Remote Buttons” later in this section.
To program up to three devices:
When programming a garage door, it is advised to
park outside of the garage. Be sure that people
and objects are clear of the garage door or
security device you are programming.
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Rolling Code
1. From inside the vehicle, press the
two outside buttons at the same time for
one to two seconds, and immediately
release them.
Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are
Rolling Code units.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Immediately return to your vehicle. Press and
hold the universal home remote button that
you would like to use to control the garage
door until the garage door moves. The
indicator light, above the selected button,
should slowly blink. You may need to hold the
button from five to 20 seconds.
4. Immediately, within one second, release the
button when the garage door moves. The
indicator light will blink rapidly until
programming is complete.
5. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. It can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit and may be a colored
button. Press this button. After you press this
button, you will have 30 seconds to complete
the following steps.
To program another Rolling Code device such as
an additional garage door opener, a security
device, or home automation device, repeat Steps
1 through 5, choosing a different function
button in Step 3 than what you used for the
garage door opener.
If these instructions do not work, you probably
have a Fixed Code garage door opener. Follow the
Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed
Code garage door opener.
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program up to three devices:
Programming Universal Home
Remote — Fixed Code
Most garage door openers sold before 1996 are
Fixed Code units.
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these
actions, the device will time out and you will have
to repeat the procedure.
1. To verify if you have a Fixed Code garage
door opener, remove the battery cover on
your hand held transmitter supplied by
the manufacturer of your garage door opener
motor. If you see a row of dip switches
similar to the graphic above, you have a Fixed
Code garage door opener. If you do not see
a row of dip switches, return to the previous
section for Programming Universal Home
Remote – Rolling Code.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Two Positions
Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions
Your panel of switches may not appear
exactly as they do in the examples above, but
they should be similar.
The switch positions on your hand-held
transmitter may be labeled, as follows:
• A switch in the up position may be labeled
as “Up,” “+,” or “On.”
• A switch in the down position may be
labeled as “Down,” “−,” or “Off.”
• A switch in the middle position may be
labeled as “Middle,” “0,” or “Neutral.”
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings
from left to right as follows:
• When a switch is in the up position,
write “Left.”
• When a switch is in the down position,
write “Right.”
• If a switch is set between the up and down
position, write “Middle.”
The switch settings that you wrote down in
Step 2 will now become the button strokes
you enter into the Universal Home Remote in
Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings
that you wrote down in Step 2, in order from
left to right, into the Universal Home Remote,
when completing Step 4.
4. The indicator lights will blink slowly. Enter each
switch setting from Step 2 into your vehicle’s
Universal Home Remote. You will have two
and one-half minutes to complete Step 4. Now
press one button on the Universal Home
Remote for each switch setting as follows:
• If you wrote “Left,” press the left button in the
vehicle.
3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press
all three buttons at the same time for
about three seconds. Release the buttons to
put the Universal Home Remote into
programming mode.
• If you wrote “Right,” press the right button in
the vehicle.
• If you wrote “Middle,” press the middle
button in the vehicle.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. After entering all of the switch positions,
again, firmly press and release all three
buttons at the same time. The indicator lights
will turn on.
Reprogramming Universal Home
Remote Buttons
You can reprogram any of the three buttons by
repeating the instructions.
6. Press and hold the button you would like to
use to control the garage door until the
garage door moves. The indicator light above
the selected button should slowly blink.
You may need to hold the button from five to
55 seconds.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
You should erase the programmed buttons when
you sell or terminate your lease.
7. Immediately release the button when the
garage door moves. The indicator light will
blink rapidly until programming is complete.
To erase either Rolling Code or Fixed Code on
the Universal Home Remote device:
1. Press and hold the two outside buttons at the
same time for approximately 20 seconds, until
the indicator lights, located directly above
the buttons, begin to blink rapidly.
8. Press and release the same button again.
The garage door should move, confirming
that programming is successful and complete.
To program another Fixed Code device such as an
additional garage door opener, a security device,
or home automation device, repeat Steps 1-8,
choosing a different button in Step 6 than what you
used for the garage door opener.
2. Once the indicator lights begin to blink,
release both buttons. The codes from all
buttons will be erased.
For help or information on the Universal Home
Remote System, call the customer assistance
phone number under Customer Assistance Offices
on page 508.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate button for at least
half of a second. The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Center Console Storage Area
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open, lift the handle up. Use the key to lock
and unlock.
Cupholder(s)
There are two cupholders, with removable liners,
located in front of the center console. There
are cupholders located in the second row seat
armrest. To access, pull the armrest down. There
are additional cupholders located on each side
of the third row seat and in each door. There are
cupholders located behind the center console.
To access, pull down on the handle.
The armrest on the center console can slide
forwards and backwards by holding up the lever
located on the front of it. To open the armrest
storage area, press the button located on the front
of the armrest. There is additional storage
under the armrest. Move the armrest all the way
to the rear position. The tray can be removed
for additional storage.
Instrument Panel Storage Area
Your vehicle has an instrument panel storage area
located above the radio. To open the cover,
press the button.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Floor Mats
Luggage Carrier
There is a grommet in the driver side floor mat
that attaches to a hook on the floor of the vehicle.
This allows the mat to remain in position under
your feet and out of reach of the accelerator and
brake pedal. To remove the floor mat, pull the
mat towards the rear of the vehicle until the
grommet can be removed from the hook.
{CAUTION:
If you try to carry something on top of
your vehicle that is longer or wider than
the luggage carrier — like paneling,
plywood, a mattress and so forth — the
wind can catch it as you drive along. This
can cause you to lose control. What you
are carrying could be violently torn off,
and this could cause you or other drivers
to have a collision, and of course damage
your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never
carry something longer or wider than the
luggage carrier on top of your vehicle.
Make sure that the driver side floor mat is properly
placed on the floor so that it does not block the
movement of the accelerator and brake pedal.
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load
things on top of your vehicle. Crossrails are not
standard on this vehicle and must be purchased at
your dealer/retailer.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier
that weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or
hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle
may damage your vehicle. Load cargo so that
it rests as far forward as possible and
against the side rails, making sure to fasten it
securely.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The
convenience net is designed to help keep
small loads, like grocery bags, from falling over. It
is not designed to hold larger, heavier loads.
To install the convenience net, attach both the
upper and lower hooks to the loops on either side
of the liftgate opening.
Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity
when loading your vehicle. For more information
on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading Your
Cargo Cover
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you are
driving, check to make sure the cargo is still
securely fastened.
Your vehicle may have a cargo cover. It can be
used to cover items in the rear of the vehicle.
To install the cover, place the loops found on each
corner of the cover on the four hooks in the rear
of the vehicle. When not in use, the cover can
be stored in the cargo management system.
Rear Seat Armrest
Your vehicle may have a rear seat armrest that
contains two cupholders. To access the
cupholders, pull the armrest down from the rear
seatback.
Cargo Tie Downs
Your vehicle has eight cargo tie-downs located in
the rear of the vehicle. These are used to
secure small loads.
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the cargo management system:
1. Open the lid.
Cargo Management System
Your vehicle has a cargo management system
located in the rear of the vehicle. To open, pull the
handle toward the rear of the vehicle and lift the
cover up.
2. Remove the side panels and place inside
the bin.
3. Loosen the retaining nuts on each side of the
system by turning them counterclockwise.
4. Close the lid.
5. Pull up on the system by using the built in
handles and remove it from the vehicle.
There is an additional storage compartment on
each side of the system. To open, unsnap and lift
the panel up.
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-open/Express-close: From the closed
position, press and release the rear of the
driver’s side switch to express-open the sunroof.
Press and release the front of the driver’s side
switch to express-close the sunroof.
Sunroof
The vehicle may have a sunroof over the front
seats, and a rear sunroof over the second
row seats. The rear sunroof does not open. The
switches to operate the front sunroof and rear
sunshade are located on the headliner above the
rearview mirror. The ignition must be in ON or
ACCESSORY to operate the sunroof. See Ignition
The front sunshade must be opened and closed
manually. Push up on the sunshade handle
to open the sunshade.
Notice: The rear sunshade could be damaged
if you attempt to open or close it manually.
Do not manually open or close the rear
sunshade.
To open the rear sunshade, located over the
second row seats, press and release the rear of
the passenger’s side switch. Press and release the
front of the switch to close the sunshade.
Vent: From the closed position, press and hold
the front of the driver’s side switch to vent
the sunroof. Press and hold the rear of the driver’s
side switch to close the sunroof.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are listed here:
on page 179.
Windshield Wipers. See Turn
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic Steering
(If Equipped). See Power Tilt Wheel and
D. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See
M. Audio Steering Wheel Control Buttons. See
N. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See
page 260. Navigation/Radio System
(If Equipped). See Navigation/Radio System
on page 305.
O. Center Console Shift Lever. See “Console Shift
page 134.
P. Traction Control System (TCS) Disable Button
page 329. Tow/Haul Selector Button
on page 182.
page 132. Power Liftgate Button (If Equipped).
page 385.
Brightness Control. See Instrument Panel
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on and off. Press the button
again to turn the flashers off.
page 12.
page 198.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, the turn
signals will not work.
T. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them
up at the side of the road about 300 feet
(100 m) behind your vehicle.
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem. The
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Horn
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
in the center of the
instrument panel, below
the audio system.
Tilt and Telescopic Steering Wheel
A tilt and telescope wheel lets you adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. The steering
wheel can be raised to the highest level to give
your legs more room when you enter and exit the
vehicle.
The hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position the key is in, and even if the key is not
in the ignition.
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The lever that lets you tilt and telescope the
steering wheel is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Power Tilt Wheel and Telescopic
Steering Column
If your vehicle has this
feature, the power tilt
wheel control is located
on the left side of the
steering column.
To operate the power tilt feature, push the control
up and the steering wheel will tilt up. Push the
control down and the steering wheel will go down.
To tilt and telescope the steering wheel, pull down
the lever. Then move the steering wheel up or
down or backward or forward into a comfortable
position. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
Push the control forward and the steering wheel
moves toward the front of the vehicle. Push
the control rearward and the steering wheel moves
toward the rear of the vehicle.
Do not adjust the tilt and telescope lever while
driving.
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
For information on the headlamps, see Exterior
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will
return automatically.
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See
An arrow on the
• 2 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
page 175.
instrument panel cluster
will flash in the direction
of the turn or lane
change.
page 176.
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To signal a lane change, raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return
by itself when you release it. If you momentarily
press and release the lever, the turn signal
will flash three times.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps from low beam to
high beam, push the turn signal/multifunction lever
toward the front of the vehicle.
This light on the
If the arrow flashes faster than normal as you
signal a turn or a lane change, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers will not see
your turn signal.
instrument panel cluster
comes on if the high
beam lamps are turned
on while the ignition
is on.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when
you signal a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and
then check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
To change the headlamps from high beam to low
beam, pull the turn signal lever toward the rear
of the vehicle.
Turn Signal On Chime
If you leave either one of your turn signals on and
drive more than 3/4 mile (1.2 km), a chime will
sound to alert you.
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the
windshield wipers.
Flash-to-Pass
With the turn signal lever in the low-beam position,
pull the lever toward you momentarily to switch
to high-beam (to signal that you are going to pass).
8 (Mist): Turn the band to mist for a single
wiping cycle. Hold it there until the wipers
start. Then let go. The wipers stop after one wipe.
Hold the band on mist longer, for more wipe
cycles.
If the headlamps are on, they will return to
low-beam when the lever is released.
This feature operates even when the headlamps
are off.
9 (Off): To stop the wipers, move the band
to off.
Windshield Wipers
6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper
blades may not clear the windshield well, making
it harder to see and drive safely. If the blades
do become damaged, install new blades or blade
inserts. For more information, see Windshield
The delay between wiping cycles becomes
shorter as the band is moved to the top of the
lever. This can be very useful in light rain or snow.
6 (Low Speed): Turn the band away from
you to the first solid band past the delay settings,
for steady wiping at low speed.
? (High Speed): Turn the band further, to the
second solid band past the delay settings, for
high-speed wiping.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Windshield Washer
Windshield Washer
If your vehicle has the heated windshield washer
fluid system it can be used to help clear ice,
snow, tree sap, or bugs from the windshield. This
feature only works with the front wiper system,
not the rear wiper system.
J (Washer Fluid): Press and release this
paddle, located at the top of the turn
signal/multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on
the windshield. The wipers clear the windshield
and either stop or return to the preset speed. The
ignition key must be in ACCESSORY or ON for
this to work. See Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 409 Windshield Washer Fluid.
The button is located to
the left of the steering
column on the
instrument panel.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
Push the heated washer fluid button to activate
the heated windshield washer fluid system.
This activation begins four heated wash/wipe
cycles. The first heated wash/wipe cycle can take
up to 40 seconds to occur, depending on
outside temperature. After the first wash/wipe
cycle, it can take up to 20 seconds for each of the
remaining cycles. Press the button again to turn
off the heated windshield washer fluid system or it
will automatically turn off after four wipe cycles
have been completed.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) when
the washer fluid is low. See DIC Warnings and
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system
is activated under certain outside temperature
conditions, steam might flow out of the washer
nozzles for a short period of time before washer
fluid is sprayed. This is a normal condition.
The rear wiper control is located on the turn
signal/multifunction lever.
To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to a
wiper position.
9(Off): Slide the lever to this setting to turn the
wiper off.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID is displayed
on the DIC when the washer fluid is low. See DIC
5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Slide the lever to this
setting to turn on the rear wiper delay.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Z (Rear Wiper): Slide the lever to this setting to
turn on the rear wiper.
{CAUTION:
= (Rear Wiper Wash): Push the button on the
end of the turn signal/multifunction lever to
spray washer fluid on the rear window. The wipers
will clear the rear window and either stop or
return to your preset speed. For more washer
cycles, press and hold the button.
In freezing weather, do not use your
washer until the windshield is warmed.
Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice
on the windshield, blocking your vision.
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The cruise control
buttons are located on
left side of the
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without
keeping your foot on the accelerator. This can
really help on long trips. Cruise control does not
work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
steering wheel.
When you apply your brakes, cruise control
is turned off.
{CAUTION:
T (On/Off): Press this button to turn cruise
control on and off. The indicator comes on when
cruise control is on.
Cruise control can be dangerous where
you cannot drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic.
+ RES (Resume/Accelerate): Press this button
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to
a previously set speed.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads, fast
changes in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you could lose
control. Do not use cruise control on
slippery roads.
SET–: Press this button to set the speed or make
the vehicle decelerate.
[ (Cancel): Press this button to cancel cruise
control.
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is
set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
The cruise control light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on after the cruise control has been
set to the desired speed.
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This
shuts off the cruise control. But you do not need
to reset it.
Once you are driving about 25 mph (40 km/h) or
more, press the +RES button on your steering
wheel. The vehicle will go back to the previously
chosen speed and stay there.
{CAUTION:
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If you leave your cruise control on when
you are not using cruise, you might hit a
button and go into cruise when you do
not want to. You could be startled and
even lose control. Keep the cruise control
switch off until you want to use cruise
control.
To increase the cruise speed while using cruise
control:
• Press and hold the +RES button on the
steering wheel until you reach the desired
speed, then release it.
• To increase vehicle speed in small increments,
press the +RES button.
1. Press the cruise control on/off button.
2. Get up to the speed desired.
3. Press and release the SET– button located on
the steering wheel.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator.
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills
depends upon the vehicle speed, load, and the
steepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the accelerator pedal
to maintain the vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a
lower gear to keep the vehicle speed down.
Of course, applying the brake turns off the cruise
control. Many drivers find this to be too much
trouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.
To reduce your speed while using cruise control:
• Press and hold the SET– button on the
steering wheel until you reach the lower speed
desired, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, press
the SET– button on the steering wheel
briefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle will
go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase vehicle
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, your
vehicle will slow down to the previously set
cruise speed.
• Press the [ (cancel) button on the steering
wheel.
• Press the T (on/off) button on the steering
wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased by
turning off the cruise control or the ignition.
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic): Turn the control to this
position to automatically turn on the headlamps at
normal brightness, together with the following:
Exterior Lamps
The exterior lamps
control is located on the
instrument panel to
the left of the steering
wheel.
• Parking Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
;(Parking Lamps): Turn the control to this
position to turn on the parking lamps together with
the following:
It controls the following systems:
• Headlamps
• Taillamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Parking Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
• Fog Lamps (if equipped)
The exterior lamps control has four positions:
2(Headlamps): Turn the control to this position
to turn on the headlamps together with the
following lamps listed below. A warning chime will
sound if you open the driver’s door when the
ignition switch is off and the headlamps are on.
O (Off): Briefly turn the control to this position to
turn off the automatic light control. Briefly turn
to this position again to turn automatic light control
on again.
• Parking Lamps
• Taillamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
-(Fog Lamps) (If your vehicle has them):
Push the fog lamps control in to turn on the
fog lamps.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)/
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully
functional daytime running lamps are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
Delayed Headlamps
The delayed headlamps feature provides a period
of exterior lighting as you leave the area around
your vehicle. The feature is activated when
the headlamps are on due to the automatic
headlamps control feature described previously in
this section, and when the ignition is turned off.
Your headlamps will then remain on until the
exterior lamps control is moved to the parking
lamps position or until the pre-selected delayed
headlamp lighting period has ended.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel
makes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.
The DRL system’s automatic headlamp control
will make the low-beam headlamps come on at a
reduced brightness when the following conditions
are met:
• The ignition is in the ON position.
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
• The engine is running.
If you turn off the ignition with the headlamps
switch in the parking lamps or headlamps position,
the delayed headlamps cycle will not occur.
When the DRL are on, only the low-beam
headlamps, at a reduced level of brightness, will
be on. The headlamps, taillamps, sidemarker, and
other lamps will not be on. The instrument
panel and cluster will also not be lit.
To disable the delayed headlamps feature or
change the time of delay, see DIC Vehicle
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When it is dark enough outside, the low-beam
headlamps will turn off and the headlamps
and parking lamps will turn on. The other lamps
that come on with the headlamps will also
come on.
When the headlamps are changed to high-beam,
the fog lamps also go off.
Some localities have laws that require the
headlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.
When it is bright enough outside, the headlamps
will go off and the DRL will come on.
Instrument Panel Brightness
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): The knob
with this symbol on it is located next to the exterior
lamps control. Push the knob in all the way until
it extends out and then turn the knob clockwise to
brighten or counterclockwise to dim the lights.
Push the knob back in when finished.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the
regular headlamp system when it is needed.
Fog Lamps
- (Fog Lamps): If your vehicle has fog lamps,
the control is located on the exterior lamps control.
The exterior lamps control is located on the
Courtesy Lamps
instrument panel to the left of the steering column.
When a door is opened, the courtesy lamps
automatically come on. They make it easy for you
to enter and leave your vehicle. You can also
manually turn these lamps on by fully turning the
instrument panel brightness control clockwise.
The ignition must be in the ON position for the fog
lamps to come on.
To turn the fog lamps on, press the exterior lamps
button. A light will come on in the instrument
panel cluster. Press the exterior lamps button
again to turn the fog lamps off.
The reading lamps, located on the headliner above
the rearview mirror, can be turned on or off
independent of the automatic courtesy lamps,
when the doors are closed.
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dome Lamps
Entry Lighting
The dome lamps automatically come on when a
door is opened, unless the dome lamp override
button is pressed in.
Your vehicle may have courtesy lamps that will
come on and stay on for a set time whenever the
unlock symbol is pressed on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter, if the vehicle
has one.
The lamps can also be turned on by turning the
instrument panel brightness control clockwise
to the farthest position. In this position, the dome
lamps will remain on until they are turned off.
If a door is opened, the lamps will stay on while it is
open and then turn off automatically about
25 seconds after the door is closed. If the unlock
symbol is pressed and you do not open a door, the
lamps will turn off after about 20 seconds.
Dome Lamp Override
The dome lamp override button is located next to
the exterior lamps control.
Entry lighting includes a feature called theater
dimming. With theater dimming, the lamps do not
turn off at the end of the delay time. Instead,
they slowly dim after the delay time until they go
out. The delay time is canceled if you turn the
ignition key to ON or press the power door
lock switch. The lamps will dim right away.
The dome lamp override is used to set the dome
lamps to remain off or come on automatically
when a door is opened.
E(Dome Lamp Override): Press the button in
and the dome lamps remain off when a door
is opened. Press the button again to return it to
the extended position so that the dome lamps
come on when a door is opened.
When the ignition is on, illuminated entry is
inactive, which means the courtesy lamps will not
come on unless a door is opened.
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Entry Lighting
Delayed Exit Lighting
Delayed entry lighting illuminates the interior for a
period of time after all the doors have been closed.
This feature illuminates the interior for a period of
time after the key is removed from the ignition.
The ignition must be off for delayed entry lighting
to work. Immediately after all the doors have been
closed, the delayed entry lighting feature will
continue to work until one of the following occurs:
The ignition must be off for delayed exit lighting to
work. When the key is removed, interior
illumination will activate and remain on until one of
the following occurs:
• The ignition is in ON.
• The doors are locked.
• The ignition is in ON.
• The power door locks are activated.
• An illumination period of 25 seconds has
elapsed.
• An illumination period of 20 seconds has
elapsed.
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled
and the interior lamps will remain on because a
door is open.
If during the illumination period a door is opened,
the timed illumination period will be canceled
and the interior lamps will remain on because a
door is open.
Parade Dimming
The instrument panel has an added feature called
parade mode. It automatically prohibits the
dimming of the instrument panel displays during
the daylight while the headlamps are on so
that you will still be able to see the displays.
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A high electrical load occurs when several of the
following loads are on: headlamps, high beams,
fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate
control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine
cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
Reading Lamps
The vehicle has reading lamps that also act as the
dome lamp. Press the button to turn them on
and off.
Electric Power Management
EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the
battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s
output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It
can increase engine idle speed to generate more
power, whenever needed. It can temporarily
reduce the power demands of some accessories.
The vehicle has Electric Power Management
(EPM) that estimates the battery’s temperature and
state of charge. It then adjusts the voltage for
best performance and extended life of the battery.
When the battery’s state of charge is low, the
voltage is raised slightly to quickly put the charge
back in. When the state of charge is high, the
voltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.
If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or a voltage
display on the Driver Information Center (DIC), you
may see the voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an alert will be
displayed.
Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,
without being noticeable. In rare cases at the
highest levels of corrective action, this action may
be noticeable to the driver. If so, a Driver
Information Center (DIC) message might be
displayed, such as Battery Saver Active or Service
Battery Charging System. If this message is
displayed, it is recommended that the driver
reduce the electrical loads as much as possible.
The battery can be discharged at idle if the
electrical loads are very high. This is true for all
vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)
may not be spinning fast enough at idle to
produce all the power that is needed for very high
electrical loads.
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA)
This vehicle has a feature to help prevent the
battery from being drained, if the interior courtesy
lamps, reading/map lamps, visor vanity lamps
or trunk lamp are accidentally left on. If any
of these lamps are left on, they will automatically
turn off after 10 minutes, if the ignition is off.
The lamps will not come back on again until one
of the following occurs:
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system it is designed to help
you park while in Reverse (R). It operates only at
speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). URPA helps
make parking easier and helps you avoid colliding
with objects such as parked vehicles. The
URPA system detects objects that are close to the
rear of the vehicle which are at least 10 inches
(25.4 cm) off the ground and below hood or trunk
level. The system detects objects up to 8 feet
(2.5 m) behind your vehicle. The URPA sensors
determine how close these objects are from
your bumper within this area.
• The ignition is turned on.
• The exterior lamps control is turned off, then
on again.
The headlamps will timeout after 10 minutes, if
they are manually turned on before the ignition
is off.
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The URPA display is
located in the headliner
and can be seen by
looking over your right
shoulder.
{CAUTION:
The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA)
system does not replace driver vision.
URPA does not:
• Operate above speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h).
• Detect objects more than 8 feet
(2.5 meters) behind the vehicle. This
distance may be less during warmer
or humid weather.
• Detect objects that are below the
bumper, underneath the vehicle, or
that are very close to the vehicle.
• Detect children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
The URPA display has three color-coded lights.
The lights are used to provide distance and system
information, along with beeps that will be heard
through the speakers.
If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center
(DIC), and PARK ASSIST OFF has been selected,
then the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE (R),
PARK ASSIST OFF will display on the DIC and
one red light in the URPA display will be lit.
more information.
So if you do not use proper care before
backing up, you could hit a vehicle, child,
pedestrian, bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death. Even
though the vehicle has the URPA system,
always check carefully before backing up
by checking behind your vehicle.
URPA automatically turns back on each time the
vehicle is started.
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How the System Works
How the System Works when Backing
When the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R),
the rear display will briefly come on to let you
know the display is operating correctly. URPA
comes on automatically when the shift lever
is moved into REVERSE (R).
If the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), URPA
detects objects close to the rear bumper. The first
time an object is detected a single beep will
sound. If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R)
speed between 0 mph (0 km/h) and 5 mph
(8 km/h), the following describes what will occur
based on your distance to a detected object
located behind the vehicle:
The system does not work at a reverse speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). To remind you of this,
the red light on the rear display will flash.
• At distances between 40 inches (1 m) and
8 ft (2.5 m), a single amber light will come on.
To disable URPA, see DIC Operation and Displays
and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 235
for more information.
• At distances between 23 inches (0.6 m) and
40 inches (1 m), both amber lights will be on.
• At distances between 12 inches (0.3 m) and
23 inches (0.6 m), all three lights (amber/
amber/red) will be on.
• At distances less than 12 inches (0.3 m), a
beeping sound will repeat for a short time and
all three lights (amber/amber/red) will flash.
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
If the URPA system will not activate due to a
temporary condition, the message PARK ASSIST
OFF will display on the DIC screen and a red
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
light will come on the URPA display when the shift
lever is moved into REVERSE (R). This occurs
under the following conditions:
• The ultrasonic sensors need to be kept clean.
So, be sure to keep your vehicle’s rear bumper
free of mud, dirt, snow, ice, and slush. For
cleaning instructions, see Washing Your
PARK ASSIST OFF message after cleaning the
bumper and driving forward at a speed of at
least 15 mph (25 km/h), see your
• The parking brake pedal is depressed.
• A trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a
bicycle or an object was hanging out of your
trunk during your last drive when you turned off
the vehicle. If the attached objects are removed
from your vehicle before the start of your next
drive, the system will return to normal operation
unless an object is detected when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R). If this occurs, URPA
assumes the object is still attached, so you will
have to wait until the vehicle is driven forward
above 15 mph (25 km/h) before URPA will
return to normal operation.
dealer/retailer.
• Other conditions that may affect system
performance include vibrations from a
jackhammer or the compression of air brakes
on a very large truck or other mechanical
devices that interfere with URPA performance.
As always, drivers should use care when backing
up a vehicle. Always look behind you, being
sure to check for other vehicles, obstructions and
blind spots.
If the vehicle bumper is damaged, the URPA
system may not work properly. Take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer to repair the system.
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to
your vehicle may damage it or keep other
components from working as they should. The
repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding
maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Check with your dealer/retailer before adding
electrical equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to
connect electrical equipment such as a cellular
phone or CB radio.
Your vehicle may have four accessory power
outlets. They are located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls, inside the front
center console storage bin, at the rear of the
center console, and in the rear cargo area.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to
follow the installation instructions included with the
equipment.
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in
use, always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can
cause damage not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of accessory or
accessory bracket from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for accessory
power plugs only.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
turn off electrical equipment when not in
use and do not plug in equipment that exceeds
the maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.
Certain electrical accessories may not be
compatible with the accessory power outlets and
could result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If you experience a problem, see your
dealer/retailer for additional information on the
accessory power outlet.
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The indicator on the inner outlet face will come on
when 115 volt AC power is available. The AC
power is available when the ignition is turned to
ACCESSORY or ON, and electrical equipment
is plugged into the outlet. The AC power is
not available in the outlet when the ignition is
turned to OFF.
Power Outlet 115 Volt Alternating
Current
Your vehicle may have a power outlet that can be
used to plug in auxiliary electrical equipment
with a maximum limit of 150 watts. If you try to
use equipment that requires more than the limit, a
protection circuit will cut the power supply. To
reset the outlet, unplug the item and plug it back
in or turn the ignition to LOCK or ACCESSORY
and then back on. The power will automatically
restart when equipment that operates within
the limit is plugged into the outlet.
The power outlet is not designed for the following
electrical equipment and may not work properly
if these items are plugged into the power outlet:
• Equipment with high initial peak wattage
such as: compressor-driven refrigerators
and electric power tools.
• Other equipment requiring an extremely stable
power supply such as:
The power outlet is
located on the rear of
the center console.
microcomputer-controlled electric blankets,
touch sensor lamps, etc.
page 475.
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the temperature of the air flowing
from the system.
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating,
cooling, defrost, defog, and ventilation of
the vehicle.
Airflow Mode Control: Turn the right knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to direct the airflow
inside of the vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the
following:
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs about half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets and
half to the floor outlets. A little air is directed
towards the windshield and side window outlets.
Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.
Manual Operation
9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise
to turn the front system off.
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The recirculation mode can be turned off in vent
and bi-level modes by pressing the button
again. Recirculation mode automatically turns off
when the engine is turned off and must be
re-selected when the engine is turned on again.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to
the floor outlets, with some of the air directed
to the windshield, side window outlets, and
second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system
automatically selects outside air. Recirculation
cannot be selected when in Floor Mode.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select
recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator
flashes three times and turns off. The air
conditioning compressor also comes on when this
mode is activated unless the outside air
temperature is less than 40°F (4°C). While in
recirculation mode the windows may fog when the
weather is cold and damp. To clear the fog,
select either the defog or defrost mode and
increase the fan speed.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see
“Defogging and Defrosting” later in this section.
By positioning the right knob between two modes,
a combination of those two modes is selected.
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on or off. The indicator light
on the button turns on when this mode is selected.
This mode keeps outside air from entering the
vehicle. It can be used to reduce the outside air
and odors entering the vehicle. Recirculation
may also help cool the air inside the vehicle more
quickly once the temperature inside the vehicle
is less than the outside temperature.
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This helps to reduce the time it takes for the
vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to
operate more efficiently.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button on the
left knob to turn the air conditioning system on
or off. When A/C is pressed, an indicator
light comes on to show that the air conditioning
has been activated. The air conditioning
compressor does not operate when outside
temperatures fall below 40°F (4°C). The indicator
light flashes three times and turns off when
outside conditions affect air conditioning operation.
This is normal.
Using recirculation for long periods of time may
cause the air inside of the vehicle to become
too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the
inside of the vehicle has cooled, turn the
recirculation mode off.
The air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so you might notice a small amount
of water dripping underneath the front center
and right rear of the vehicle while idling or after
turning off the engine. This is normal.
For quicker cool down on hot days, do the
following:
1. Open the windows to let hot air escape.
2. Select the vent mode.
Defogging and Defrosting
3. Select the air conditioner.
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of
high humidity (moisture) condensing on the
cool window glass. This can be minimized if the
climate control system is used properly. There are
two modes to clear fog or frost from the
windshield. Turn the right knob clockwise to select
the defog or defrost mode.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
6. Close the windows after the hot air has
escaped.
7. Once the vehicle’s interior temperature is
below the outside temperature, select
recirculation mode for better cooling.
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. This mode directs air to the
windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.
When you select this mode, the system turns
off recirculation and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is less
than 40°F (4°C). The recirculation mode cannot
be selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive
the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button
on the right knob to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. The rear window defogger
stays on about 10 minutes after the button
is pressed, before turning off. The defogger can
also be turned off by pressing the button again or
by turning off the engine. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used to
remove fog or frost from the windshield more
quickly. This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and side window vents and some to the
floor vents. In this mode, the system will
automatically force outside air into your vehicle.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in
the defrost mode. The air conditioning compressor
will run automatically in this setting, unless the
outside temperature is less than 40°F (4°C). Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview
mirrors, the mirrors heat to help clear fog or frost
from the surface of the mirror when the rear
window defog button is pressed.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the
inside of the rear window. If you do, you could
cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,
tape, a decal or anything similar to the
defogger grid.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to turn the rear
heating and air conditioning on. See Rear Air
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Function
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
Each time the temperature, mode, or fan control
buttons are pressed the display shows that
function along with the inside temperature setting.
The display automatically reverts back to the
outside temperature display after a short delay.
With this system, you can control the heating,
cooling, and ventilation in your vehicle. Your
vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system
described later in this section.
Driver’s Side Temperature Control
The driver side temperature buttons are used to
adjust the temperature of the air coming through
the system on the driver side. The temperature can
be adjusted even if the system is turned off.
This is possible since outside air will always flow
through the system as the vehicle is moving
forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See
“Recirculation” later in this section.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease
the temperature. The driver side temperature
display will show the temperature setting
decreasing or increasing.
You can select different temperature settings for
the driver and all passengers.
198
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger’s Side Temperature Control
Automatic Operation
The passenger’s temperature buttons can be used
to change the temperature of the air coming
through the system on the passenger side of the
vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted
even if the system is turned off. This is possible
since outside air will always flow through the
system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it
is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation”
later in this section.
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system controls the inside temperature,
the air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display shows
the current temperature(s) selected and AUTO
is on the display. The current delivery mode
and fan speed also display for approximately
5 seconds.
Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease
the temperature. The passenger side display
will show the temperature setting decreasing or
increasing.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet are automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor
runs when the outside temperature is
over about 40°F (4°C). The air inlet is normally
set to outside air. If it is hot outside, the air
inlet can automatically switch to recirculate
inside air to help quickly cool down your
vehicle. The light comes on the recirculation
button while in recirculation.
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by
pressing the PASS button and turning off the
PASS indicator. When the passenger’s
temperature setting is set different than the
driver’s setting, the indicator on the PASS button
comes on and both the driver side and
passenger side temperature displays are shown.
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the
system delays turning on the fan until warm air is
available. The length of delay depends on the
engine coolant temperature. Press the fan switch
to override this delay and change the fan to a
selected speed.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 73°F
(22.5°C) temperature setting and allow
about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.
Use the driver’s or passenger’s temperature
buttons to adjust the temperature setting
as necessary. If you choose the temperature
setting of 60°F (15°C), the system remains
at the maximum cooling setting. If you choose
the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C), the
system remains at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not
cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
O (On/Off): Press this button to turn off the
climate control system. Outside air still enters the
vehicle, and is directed to the floor. This
direction can be changed by pressing the mode
button. Recirculation can only be selected in
vent or bi-level mode. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature button. If you
adjust the air delivery mode or temperature
settings with the system off, the display comes on
briefly to show the settings and then turns off.
Press the on/off button or the up down arrows on
the fan switch, the defrost button, AUTO button,
or the air conditioning button to turn the system on
when it is off.
Do not cover the solar sensor located on the top
of the instrument panel near the windshield.
This sensor regulates air temperature based on
sun load and also turns on your vehicle’s
headlamps. For more information on the solar
sensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Operation
H (Vent): This setting delivers air to the
instrument panel outlets.
The air delivery mode or fan speed can be
manually adjusted.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air to the
instrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets. A
little air is directed towards the windshield and
side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
DC (Fan): The buttons with the fan symbols let
you manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up
arrow to increase fan speed and the down arrow to
decrease fan speed.
Pressing a fan button while the system is off will
turn the system on. Pressing a fan button while in
automatic control places the fan under manual
control. The fan setting remains displayed and the
AUTO button light turns off. The air delivery mode
remains in automatic control.
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air
to the floor outlets, with some of the air directed to
the windshield, side window outlets, and second
row floor outlets. In this mode, the system
automatically selects outside air. Recirculation
cannot be selected in floor mode.
yN z (Mode): Press the mode up and down
buttons to manually change the direction of the
airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly press the button
until the desired mode appears on the display.
Pressing a mode button while the system is off will
change air delivery mode without turning the
system on. Pressing one of these buttons while in
automatic control to place the mode under manual
control.
- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later
in this section.
@ (Recirculation): Press this button to turn the
recirculation mode on. When the button is
pressed, an indicator light comes on.
This mode keeps outside air from entering the
vehicle. It can be used to reduce outside air and
prevent odors from entering your vehicle.
Recirculation also helps to quickly cool the warmer
air inside your vehicle.
The air delivery mode setting displays and the
AUTO button light turns off. The fan remains under
automatic control.
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor,
defrost, or defogging modes. If you try to select
recirculation in one of those modes, the indicator
flashes three times and turns off. The air
conditioning compressor also comes on when this
mode is activated. While in recirculation mode
the windows may fog when the weather is cold and
damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog
or defrost mode and increase the fan speed.
The air conditioning compressor does not work
when outside temperatures fall below 40°F (4°C).
Pressing this button when the outside temperature
is too cool makes the air conditioning indicator
flash three times and turn off to let you know the
air conditioning mode is not available. If the
air conditioning is on and the outside temperature
drops below a temperature which is too cool
for air conditioning to be effective, the air
conditioning light turns off to show that the air
conditioning mode has been canceled.
Press the button again to turn off the recirculation
mode. It automatically turns off when the engine
is turned off and must be re-selected when
the engine is turned on again.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let
hot inside air escape. This helps to reduce the
time it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also
helps the system to operate more efficiently.
Air Conditioning
The air conditioning system removes moisture from
the air, so you may sometimes notice a small
amount of water dripping underneath your vehicle
while idling or after turning off the engine. This
is normal.
# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
the air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and
off. When air conditioning is selected, an indicator
light comes on to let you know that the air
conditioning has been activated.
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sensors
The interior temperature sensor located on the
instrument panel to the right of the steering
column, measures the temperature of the air inside
the vehicle.
The solar sensor, located in the defrost grille in
the middle of the instrument panel, monitors
the solar radiation. Do not cover the solar sensor
or the system will not work properly.
There is also an exterior temperature sensor
located behind the front grille. This sensor reads
the outside air temperature and helps maintain the
temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on
the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading
in the displayed temperature.
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The climate control system uses the information
from these sensors to maintain your comfort
setting by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan
speed, and the air delivery mode. The system may
also supply cooler air to the side of the vehicle
facing the sun. The recirculation mode will also be
used as needed to maintain cool outlet
temperatures.
When you select this mode, the system turns off
recirculation and runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is close
to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defog mode. Do not drive the
vehicle until all the windows are clear.
0 (Defrost): Press this button to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly. This mode
directs most of the air to the windshield and side
window vents and some to the floor vents. In this
mode, the system automatically forces outside air
into your vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in the defrost mode. The air
conditioning compressor runs automatically in this
setting, unless the outside temperature is close to
freezing. Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of
high humidity (moisture) condensing on the
cool window glass. This can be minimized if the
climate control system is used properly. There are
two modes to clear fog or frost from your
windshield.
Use the mode up and down arrows to select the
defog mode. Use the defrost button to select
the defrost mode.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to turn the rear
heating and air conditioning on. See Rear Air
- (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the
windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. This mode directs air to the
windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents.
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
Use the slider switch in the center of the outlet, to
change the direction of the air flow. Use the
thumbwheel near the outlet to control the amount
of air flow or to shut off the airflow completely.
< (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button
to turn the rear window defogger on or off. The rear
window defogger stays on for about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed, before turning off. The
defogger can also be turned off by pressing the
button again or by turning off the engine. Do not
drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
Keep all outlets open whenever possible for best
system performance.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
can block the flow of air into the vehicle.
If your vehicle has heated outside rearview mirrors,
the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost
from the surface of the mirror when the rear
window defog button is pressed.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors can
adversely affect the performance of the
system.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp
object to clear the inside rear window. Do not
adhere anything to the defogger grid lines
in the rear glass. These actions may damage
the rear defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
• Keep the path under all seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside the vehicle
more effectively.
• If fogging reoccurs while in vent or bi-level
modes with mild temperature throughout
the vehicle, turn on the air conditioner
to reduce windshield fogging.
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System
If your vehicle has this system, the rear controls
are three knobs located on the rear of the
center console. The system can be controlled from
the front controls as well as the rear controls.
To turn the system on, press the AUX button on
the front climate control system, an indicator will be
lit. Pressing the AUX button the first time will
turn the rear system on in a mimic mode. In this
mode, the airflow in the rear will be approximately
the same direction, temperature, and fan speed
as the front. Pressing the AUX button again
will turn the rear system and the indicator off.
Fan Knob
Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn
the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the
rear system off.
If the rear controls are adjusted, the system turns
on in a rear independent mode. Airflow in the rear
will then be directed according to the settings of the
rear controls. The rear system can be turned off by
pressing the AUX button on the front climate control
system and the indicator will turn off. The system
can be turned back on, by adjusting any of the rear
air conditioning control knobs.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you
select the temperature of the air flowing into the
passenger area. Turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise for warmer or cooler air.
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mode Knob
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System and Electronic Climate
Controls
The right knob on the control panel lets you
choose the direction of the air flow.
H(Vent): This setting directs the air through the
If your vehicle has this rear climate control system
there are rear seat audio controls located in the
center console.
headliner outlets.
)(Bi-Level): This setting directs the air through
the rear floor outlets under the third row seat,
as well as the headliner outlets. The flow can be
divided between headliner and floor outlets
depending upon where the knob is placed between
the settings.
The rear system can be controlled through the
AUX button on the front climate control panel.
Press the AUX button to turn the rear climate
control system on or off. An indicator light in the
AUX button comes on when the rear climate
control system is on. The direction, temperature,
and speed of the airflow for the rear of the vehicle
will be the same as those set for the front of the
vehicle.
6(Floor): This setting directs the air through the
floor outlets. The rear system floor outlets are
located under the third row seats.
Use the controls located in the rear of the front
console, to independently control the air flow
for the rear of the vehicle separately from that of
the front of the vehicle. To turn the system
on, press any of the rear air conditioning control
buttons, except the fan down button. To turn
the system off, press and hold the C button.
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
+/− (Increase/Decrease Temperature): These
buttons select the temperature of the air flowing into
the rear passenger area. Press the + button for
warmer air and press the − button for cooler air.
The temperature settings will display in 0-12
increments, going from the coolest (0) to the
warmest (12) setting.
N (Mode): Press the mode button to manually
change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle.
Repeatedly press the button until the desired mode
appears on the display. Multiple presses cycles
through the delivery selections.
Rear Climate Control with Rear Seat Audio Controls
H (Vent): This mode directs air through the
headliner outlets.
Manual Operation
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs air through the
floor outlets as well as the headliner outlets.
The rear system floor outlets are located under
the third row seats.
DC (Fan): The fan buttons on the rear seat audio
control panel let you manually adjust the fan
speed. Press D to increase airflow and C
to decrease airflow.
6 (Floor): This mode directs air through the
floor outlets. The rear system floor outlets
are located under the third row seats.
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often
gages and warning lights work together to let
you know when there is a problem with your
vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and
stays on as you are driving, or when one of
the gages shows there may be a problem, check
the section that tells you what to do about it.
Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do
repairs can be costly and even dangerous. So
please get to know your vehicle’s warning
lights and gages. They can be a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something
is wrong before it becomes serious enough to
cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying
attention to the warning lights and gages could also
save you or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As
the details show on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they are working. If
you are familiar with this section, you should
not be alarmed when this happens.
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to
know to drive safely and economically.
United States version shown, Canada similar
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
The speedometer lets you see your speed
in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers
per hour (km/h).
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime
will come on for several seconds to remind
people to fasten their safety belts, unless the
driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles or kilometers.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If
your vehicle needs a new odometer installed,
the new one will be set to the mileage total of the
old odometer. If this is not possible, it will be
set at zero and a label must be put on the driver’s
door to show the old mileage reading when the
new odometer was installed. If the mileage
is unknown, the label should then indicate
“previous mileage unknown”.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder
Light
Airbag Readiness Light
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. The system check includes the
airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the
Several seconds after the key is turned to ON or
START, a chime will sound for several seconds to
remind the front passenger to buckle their safety
belt. This would only occur if the passenger airbag
page 86 for more information. The passenger
safety belt light will also come on and stay on for
several seconds, then it will flash for several more.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
This chime and light are
repeated if the
passenger remains
unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither
the chime nor the light will come on.
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,
your airbag system may not work properly.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light stays on after
you start your vehicle, it means the airbag
system may not be working properly. The
airbags in your vehicle may not inflate in
a crash, or they could even inflate without
a crash. To help avoid injury to yourself
or others, have your vehicle serviced right
away if the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start your vehicle.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when you turn the ignition key to ON.
If the light does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag are enabled (may
inflate).
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you
have a rear-facing child restraint installed
in the right front passenger’s seat, it means
that the passenger sensing system has not
turned off the passenger’s frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped). A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously injured or killed if
the right front passenger’s airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the rear-facing
child restraint would be very close to the
inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag
status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a
system check. If you use remote start to start your
vehicle from a distance, if your vehicle has this
feature, you may not see the system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator
will light either ON or OFF, or either the on
or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal and seat-mounted
side impact airbags.
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator
lights remain on, or if there are no lights at
all, there may be a problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing
system is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag (if
equipped) if the system detects a
{CAUTION:
rear-facing child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can guarantee that
an airbag will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is or airbags are off.
If the airbag readiness light in the
instrument panel cluster ever comes on
and stays on, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system. If
this ever happens, have the vehicle
serviced promptly, because an adult-size
person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the
protection of the airbag(s). See Airbag
this, including important safety
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the
passenger airbag status indicator, it means that
the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag. See Passenger
including important safety information.
information.
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Voltmeter Gage
The charging system
light will come on briefly
when you turn on the
ignition, but the engine is
not running, as a check
to show you it is working.
When the engine is not
running, but the ignition
is turned to ON, this
gage shows the
battery’s state of charge
in DC volts.
It should go out once the engine is running. If it
stays on, or comes on while you are driving,
you may have a problem with the charging system.
It could indicate that you have problems with a
generator drive belt, or another electrical problem.
Have it checked right away. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery.
When the engine is running, this gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The vehicle’s
charging system regulates voltage based on
the state of charge of the battery. The voltmeter
may fluctuate. This is normal. Readings between
the low and high warning zones indicate the
normal operating range.
When this light comes on, the Driver Information
Center (DIC) will also display the SERVICE
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM message. See
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 239
for more information.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such
as the radio and air conditioner.
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur
when a large number of electrical accessories are
operating in the vehicle and the engine is left
idling for an extended period.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part is not working, the other
part can still work and stop you. For good
If there is a problem with the battery charging
system, a SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM message will appear in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) and/or the charging
system light will come on. See DIC Warnings and
braking, though, you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected
right away.
However, readings in either warning zone may
indicate a possible problem in the electrical
system. Have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,
have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem.
This light may also come on due to low brake
information.
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will also come on when you set your
parking brake. The light will stay on if your parking
brake does not release fully. If it stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means you
have a brake problem.
Antilock Brake System Warning
Light
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake
System (ABS).
This light will come on
when your engine is
started and may stay on
for several seconds.
This is normal.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
the road and stop carefully. Make sure the parking
brake is fully released. You may notice that the
pedal is harder to push or, the pedal may go closer
to the floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is
still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to off. If the
light comes on and the chime sounds when
you are driving, pull your vehicle over to a safe
location and stop as soon as possible.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to an accident.
If the light is still on after you have pulled
off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® Indicator Light
Turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again
to reset the system. If the light still stays on,
or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes,
but you do not have antilock brakes. If the regular
brake system warning light is also on, you do
not have antilock brakes and there is a problem
with your regular brakes. See Brake System
This warning light
should come on briefly
when the engine is
started.
If the warning light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem. If it stays on, or comes on when you are
driving, there may be a problem with your
StabiliTrak® system and your vehicle may need
service. When this warning light is on, the system
is off and will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
The ABS warning light will come on briefly
when you turn the ignition key to ON. This is
normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a
problem.
This light will also flash when the StabiliTrak®
system is active.
If the StabiliTrak® system warning light comes on
and stays on for an extended period of time
when the system is turned on, your vehicle needs
for more information.
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
The engine coolant
temperature warning
light will come on when
the engine has
overheated.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off
the engine as soon as possible. See Engine
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
Under normal driving conditions the gage will
read 210°F (100 °C) or less. If the gage pointer is
near 260°F (125 °C), the engine is too hot.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant
temperature warning light on could cause your
vehicle to overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 400. Your vehicle could be damaged,
and it might not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive with the engine coolant
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under
normal driving conditions, you should pull off the
road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine
as soon as possible.
temperature warning light on.
This light will also come on briefly when starting
your vehicle. If it does not, have your vehicle
serviced.
information.
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE Driver Information
Center (DIC) message will accompany the
page 239 for more information.
Tire Pressure Light
This light comes on
briefly when you turn
the ignition to ON.
Stop and check your tires as soon as it is safe to
do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper
information.
This light will flash for about 70 seconds and then
stay on if a problem is detected with the Tire
Pressure Monitor system.
for more information.
It will also come on when one or more of your
tires are significantly underinflated.
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with
this light on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well, your vehicle’s
fuel economy might not be as good, and the
engine might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that might not be
covered by your warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle has a
computer which
monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition,
and emission control
systems.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system
of your vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those of the same
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affect
your vehicle’s emission controls and can cause
this light to come on. Modifications to these
systems could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty. This could also
result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended
to make sure that emissions are at acceptable
levels for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce
a cleaner environment. The check engine light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be
indicated by the system before any problem is
apparent. This can prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This light should come on, as a check to show
you it is working, when the ignition is on and the
engine is not running. If the light does not
come on, have it repaired. This light will also
come on during a malfunction in one of two ways:
If the Light is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage
to your vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has
been detected. A misfire increases vehicle
emissions and could damage the emission
control system on your vehicle. Diagnosis and
service might be required.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount
of cargo being hauled as soon as it is
possible.
• Light On Steady — An emission control
system malfunction has been detected on your
vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be
required.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do
so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park
the vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds, and restart the engine. If the light
remains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”
following. If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If the Light Is On Steady
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
quality causes the engine not to run as efficiently
as designed. You might notice this as stalling
after start-up, stalling when you put the vehicle into
gear, misfiring, hesitation on acceleration, or
stumbling on acceleration — these conditions
might go away once the engine is warmed up. This
will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
The diagnostic system can determine if the
fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A
loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate
into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should turn the light off.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at
least one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the
light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be
wet. The condition is usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out. A few driving trips
should turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light
turn off, your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle.
Your dealer/retailer has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or
electrical problems that might have developed.
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
Some state/provincial and local governments have
or might begin programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass
this inspection could prevent you from getting a
vehicle registration.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is
low. If you do, your engine can become so
hot that it catches fire. You or others
could be burned. Check your oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle
serviced.
Here are some things you need to know to help
your vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the
check engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if
the OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control systems have not
been completely diagnosed by the system.
The vehicle would be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen if you have recently
replaced the battery or if the battery has run
down. The diagnostic system is designed
to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This can take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and
your vehicle still does not pass the inspection for
lack of OBD system readiness, your dealer/retailer
can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
This light tells you if
there could be a
problem with your
engine oil pressure.
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The light comes on when you turn your key to ON
or START. It goes off once you start your engine.
That is a check to be sure the light works. If it does
not come on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be
there to warn you if something goes wrong.
Fog Lamp Light
The fog lamp light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means
that oil is not flowing through your engine properly.
You could be low on oil and you might have
some other system problem.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are
information.
Security Light
This light flashes when
the security system is
activated.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set the
cruise control.
For more information, see Theft-Deterrent Systems
on page 119.
The light goes out when the cruise control is
more information.
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highbeam On Light
Fuel Gage
This light comes on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
page 175 for more information.
United States
Canada
Tow/Haul Mode Light
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you have left in the fuel tank.
This light comes on
when the Tow/Haul
mode has been
activated.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are
out of fuel, and you should get more fuel as
soon as possible.
When the fuel tank is low on fuel, the FUEL
LEVEL LOW message will appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC). For more information see
page 132.
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some situations you may experience with
your fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem
with the fuel gage.
The DIC also displays a shift lever position
indicator on the bottom line of the display. See
more information.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
The outside air temperature also displays on the
DIC when viewing the trip and fuel information.
The outside air temperature automatically appears
in the top right corner of the DIC display. If
there is a problem with the system that controls
the temperature display, the numbers will be
replaced with dashes. If this occurs, have
the vehicle serviced.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than
the fuel gage indicated. For example, the
gage may have indicated the tank was half full,
but it actually took a little more or less than
half the tank’s capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “DIC
Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)” later
in this section and DIC Vehicle Customization
available.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It
also displays warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, see
“DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons)” later in this section for the displays
available.
All messages will appear in the DIC display
located at the top of the instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on.
After a short delay, the DIC will display the
information that was last displayed before the
engine was turned off.
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Buttons
DIC Operation and Displays
(With DIC Buttons)
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information
below explains the operation of this system.
The DIC has different displays which can be
accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on
the instrument panel. See Instrument Panel
The buttons are the set/reset, customization,
vehicle information, and trip/fuel buttons. The
button functions are detailed in the following pages.
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset
certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge
messages on the DIC.
The DIC also allows some features to be
customized. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With
U (Customization): Press this button to
customize the feature settings on your vehicle.
on page 250 for more information.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use
the trip odometer reset stem to view the
odometer and trip odometers.
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under
should change the oil as soon as you can. See
life system monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to
display the oil life, park assist on vehicles with this
feature, units, tire pressure readings, Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) system programming, and
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
programming.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to display the
odometer, trip odometers, fuel range, average
economy, timer, fuel used, and average speed.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset
itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
display accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be
reset accurately until the next oil change. To
reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil
Vehicle Information Menu Items
T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to
scroll through the following menu items:
OIL LIFE
Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. This display shows an
estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you
see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display,
that means 99% of the current oil life remains. The
engine oil life system will alert you to change
the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving
conditions.
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARK ASSIST
FRONT TIRES or REAR TIRES
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the
DIC. The tire pressure will be shown in either
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa).
Press the vehicle information button until the DIC
displays FRONT TIRES PSI (kPa)
LEFT ## RIGHT ##. Press the vehicle information
button again until the DIC displays REAR TIRES
PSI (kPa) LEFT ## RIGHT ##.
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, press the vehicle
information button until PARK ASSIST displays.
This display allows the system to be turned on or
off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button
to select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON,
the system will be turned on. If you choose OFF,
the system will be turned off. The URPA system
automatically turns back on after each vehicle start.
When the URPA system is turned off and the
vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC will
display the PARK ASSIST OFF message as a
reminder that the system has been turned off. See
page 188 for more information.
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected
by the system while driving, a message advising
you to check the pressure in a specific tire
will appear in the display. See Inflation - Tire
If the tire pressure display shows dashes
instead of a value, there may be a problem with
your vehicle. If this consistently occurs, see
your dealer/retailer for service.
UNITS
Press the vehicle information button until UNITS
displays. This display allows you to select between
English or Metric units of measurement. Once in
this display, press the set/reset button to select
between ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of
the vehicle information will then be displayed in
the unit of measurement selected.
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A chime will sound indicating that the
transmitter is matched.
RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS
After rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or
sensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system
must re-learn the tire positions. To re-learn the tire
page 239 for more information.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight
transmitters matched to it.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must
cycle the key to OFF.
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
Blank Display
This display allows you to match Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. To match
a RKE transmitter to your vehicle, do the following:
This display shows no information.
Trip/Fuel Menu Items
1. Press the vehicle information button until
PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY
displays.
3 (Trip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll
through the following menu items:
2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
ODOMETER
Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the
vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km). Pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will also display the odometer.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons
on the first transmitter at the same time for
about 15 seconds.
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and
the second will match driver 2.
To switch between English and metric
measurements, see “UNITS” later in this section.
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then
the retro-active reset feature is activated, the
display will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle
begins moving, the display will then increase
to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
TRIP A and TRIP B
Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP A or TRIP B
displays. This display shows the current distance
traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km)
since the last reset for each trip odometer. Both
trip odometers can be used at the same time.
Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
also display the trip odometers.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after
the vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,
the display will show the number of miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) that were driven during the last
ignition cycle.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately
by pressing the set/reset button or the trip
odometer reset stem while the desired trip
odometer is displayed.
RANGE
The trip odometer has a feature called the
retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip
odometer to the number of miles (kilometers)
driven since the ignition was last turned on. This
can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the
beginning of the trip.
Press the trip/fuel button until RANGE displays.
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle
can be driven without refueling. The display will
show LOW if the fuel level is low.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving
history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. This estimate will change if driving conditions
change.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and
hold the set/reset button for at least four seconds.
The trip odometer will display the number of
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven since the
ignition was last turned on and the vehicle
was moving. Once the vehicle begins moving, the
trip odometer will accumulate mileage.
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is in
the fuel tank. This is because different driving
conditions produce different fuel economies.
Generally, freeway driving produces better fuel
economy than city driving. Fuel range cannot
be reset.
To start the timer, press the set/reset button while
TIMER is displayed. The display will show the
amount of time that has passed since the timer was
last reset, not including time the ignition is off. Time
will continue to be counted as long as the ignition is
on, even if another display is being shown on the
DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will return to zero.
AVG (Average) ECONOMY
To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly
while TIMER is displayed.
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG ECONOMY
displays. This display shows the approximate
average miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This number is
calculated based on the number of mpg (L/100 km)
recorded since the last time this menu item was
reset. To reset AVG ECONOMY, press and hold
the set/reset button.
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the
set/reset button while TIMER is displayed.
FUEL USED
Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL USED
displays. This display shows the number of
gallons (gal) or liters (L) of fuel used since the last
reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the set/reset button
while FUEL USED is displayed.
TIMER
Press the trip/fuel button until TIMER displays.
This display can be used as a timer.
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DIC displays trip and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system
problem is detected.
AVG (Average) SPEED
Press the trip/fuel button until AVG SPEED
displays. This display shows the average speed of
the vehicle in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers
per hour (km/h). This average is calculated
based on the various vehicle speeds recorded
since the last reset of this value. To reset the value
to zero, press and hold the set/reset button.
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you
can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the
following displays: odometer, trip odometers,
oil life, park assist menu for vehicles with
the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) system programming,
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
Blank Display
programming, units, and display language.
This display shows no information.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can use the
trip odometer reset stem to view the following
displays: odometer and trip odometers.
DIC Operation and Displays
(Without DIC Buttons)
Trip Odometer Reset Stem Menu Items
ODOMETER
If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the
information below explains the operation of
this system.
Press the trip odometer reset stem until
ODOMETER displays. This display shows the
distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
The DIC has different displays which can be
accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem
located on the instrument panel cluster. Pressing
the trip odometer reset stem will also turn off,
or acknowledge, DIC messages.
To switch between English and metric
measurements, see “UNITS” later in this section.
235
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles
(8 km) before it is started again, and then
the retro-active reset feature is activated, the
display will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle
begins moving, the display will then increase
to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.
TRIP A or TRIP B
Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP A or
TRIP B displays. This display shows the current
distance traveled in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km) since the last reset for each trip
odometer. Both trip odometers can be used at the
same time.
If the retro-active reset feature is activated after
the vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,
the display will show the number of miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) that were driven during the last
ignition cycle.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately
by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset
stem while the desired trip odometer is displayed.
The trip odometer has a feature called the
retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip
odometer to the number of miles (kilometers)
driven since the ignition was last turned on. This
can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the
beginning of the trip.
OIL LIFE
To access this display, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press the trip odometer reset stem until
OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display
shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful
life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the
display, that means 99% of the current oil life
remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to
change the oil on a schedule consistent with
your driving conditions.
To use the retro-active reset feature, press and
hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least
four seconds. The trip odometer will display the
number of miles (mi) or kilometers (km) driven
since the ignition was last turned on and the
vehicle was moving. Once the vehicle begins
moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage.
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under
should change the oil as soon as you can. See
life system monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in the Maintenance
Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
PARK ASSIST
To access this display, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear
Parking Assist (URPA) system, press the trip
odometer reset stem until PARK ASSIST displays.
This display allows the system to be turned on
or off. Once in this display, press and hold the trip
odometer reset stem to select between ON or
OFF. If you choose ON, the system will be turned
on. If you choose OFF, the system will be
turned off. The URPA system automatically turns
back on after each vehicle start. When the
URPA system is turned off and the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK (P), the DIC will display the
PARK ASSIST OFF message as a reminder
that the system has been turned off. See DIC
page 188 for more information.
Remember, you must reset the OIL LIFE display
yourself after each oil change. It will not reset
itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE
display accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be
reset accurately until the next oil change. To
reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS
To access this display, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). After rotating the tires or after replacing
a tire or sensor, the Tire Pressure Monitor
(TPM) system must re-learn the tire positions. To
re-learn the tire positions, see Tire Pressure
On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first
transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the
second will match driver 2.
A chime will sound indicating that the
transmitter is matched.
4. To match additional transmitters at this time,
repeat Step 3.
RELEARN REMOTE KEY
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
To access this display, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). This display allows you to match
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to your
vehicle. To match an RKE transmitter to your
vehicle, do the following:
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem
until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is
displayed.
5. To exit the programming mode, you must
cycle the key to OFF.
UNITS
To access this display, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). Press the trip odometer reset stem until
UNITS displays. This display allows you to
select between English or Metric units of
measurement. Once in this display, press and
hold the trip odometer reset stem to select
between ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the
vehicle information will then be displayed in
the unit of measurement selected.
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
DIC Warnings and Messages
To access this display, the vehicle must be in
PARK (P). This display allows you to select
the language in which the DIC messages will
appear. To select a language, do the following:
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the
driver that the status of the vehicle has changed
and that some action may be needed by the driver
to correct the condition. Multiple messages may
appear one after another.
1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until
DISPLAY LANGUAGE, LANGUE AFFICHAGE
(French), or MOSTRAR IDIOMA (Spanish)
displays.
Some messages may not require immediate
action, but you can press any of the DIC buttons
on the instrument panel or the trip odometer
reset stem on the instrument panel cluster
to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display.
2. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer
reset stem to scroll through all of the available
languages.
The available languages are ENGLISH
(default), FRANCAIS (French), and ESPANOL
(Spanish).
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC
display because they are more urgent. These
messages require action before they can be
cleared. You should take any messages that
appear on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the messages will only make the
3. Once the desired language is displayed,
release the trip odometer reset stem to
set your choice.
messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can
be displayed and some information about them.
239
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL ON
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
system, this message displays when there
is a compact spare tire on the vehicle, when the
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning light comes
on, or when the rear differential fluid is
overheating. This message turns off when the
differential fluid cools.
This message displays when the automatic
headlamps are turned on. This message clears
itself after 10 seconds.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
This message displays when the system detects
that the battery voltage is dropping below expected
levels. The battery saver system starts reducing
certain features of the vehicle that you may
be able to notice. At the point that the features are
disabled, this message is displayed. It means
that the vehicle is trying to save the charge in the
battery.
The AWD system is disabled until the compact
spare tire is replaced by a full-size tire. If the
warning message is still on after putting on the
full-size tire, you need to reset the warning
message. To reset the warning message, turn the
ignition off and then back on again after
30 seconds. If the message stays on, see your
dealer/retailer right away. See All-Wheel Drive
Turn off all unnecessary accessories to allow the
battery to recharge.
The normal battery voltage range is
11.5 to 15.5 volts.
AUTOMATIC LIGHT CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the automatic
headlamps are turned off. This message clears
itself after 10 seconds.
240
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 432. The DIC display also shows the tire
pressure values for the front and rear tires
by pressing the vehicle information button. See
“DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons)”
earlier in this section. If the tire pressure is
low, the low tire pressure warning light comes on.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message displays when the engine oil needs
to be changed. When you change the engine
oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
SOON message. See Engine Oil Life System
on page 390 for information on how to reset the
information.
CRUISE SET TO XXX
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
This message displays whenever the cruise
more information.
This message displays when the pressure in one
or more of the vehicle’s tires need to be
checked. This message also displays LEFT
FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT
REAR to indicate which tire needs to be
checked. You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. To read the other
messages that may have been sent at the
same time, press the set/reset button or the trip
odometer reset stem. If a tire pressure message
appears on the DIC, stop as soon as you can.
Have the tire pressures checked and set to those
shown on the Tire Loading Information label.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
driver’s door is not fully closed and the vehicle
is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the vehicle,
check the door for obstructions, and close the door
again. Check to see if the message still appears
on the DIC.
241
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE HOT A/C
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
(Air Conditioning) OFF
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do
not increase the engine speed above normal
page 400 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating
temperature. See Engine Coolant Temperature
a hot engine, the air conditioning compressor
automatically turns off. When the coolant
temperature returns to normal, the air conditioning
compressor turns back on. You can continue to
drive your vehicle.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle
to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant
If this message continues to appear, have the
system repaired by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible to avoid damage to the engine.
safe place in an emergency.
ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL
If your vehicle has an oil level sensor, this
message displays if the oil level in the vehicle is
low. Check the oil level and correct it as
necessary. You may need to let the vehicle cool
or warm up and cycle the ignition to be sure
for additional information.
242
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
performance, proceed to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the next time
the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at
a reduced speed while this message is on, but
acceleration and speed may be reduced. Anytime
this message stays on, the vehicle should be
taken to your dealer/retailer for service as soon as
possible.
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine is overheating, severe engine damage
may occur. If an overheat warning appears
on the instrument panel cluster and/or
DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. See
information.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation. Stop and turn off the
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message clears when the
engine has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
fuel level is low. Refuel as soon as possible.
for more information.
HEATED WASH (Washer) FLUID
SYSTEM OFF
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the cooling system temperature gets too hot
and the engine further enters the engine coolant
page 400 for further information.
If your vehicle has this feature, this message
displays when you manually turn off the heated
windshield washer fluid system or when the
system automatically turns off. See “Heated
page 177 for more information. This message
clears itself after 10 seconds.
This message also displays when the vehicle’s
engine power is reduced. Reduced engine power
can affect the vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If
this message is on, but there is no reduction in
243
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HEATING WASH (Washer) FLUID
WASH (Washer) WIPES PENDING
If your vehicle has this feature, this message
displays when you turn on the heated windshield
washer fluid system. See “Heated Windshield
more information.
LIFTGATE OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
liftgate is open while the ignition is in ON. Turn off
the vehicle and check the liftgate. Restart the
vehicle and check for the message on the DIC
display.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
HOOD OPEN
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
engine oil pressure is low, severe engine
damage may occur. If a low oil pressure
warning appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the
cause of the low oil pressure is corrected. See
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
hood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and close
the hood again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the outside air
temperature is cold enough to create icy road
conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.
This message displays if low oil pressure levels
occur. Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause of the low oil
pressure has been corrected. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have your vehicle serviced by your
LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
driver’s side rear door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message still
appears on the DIC.
244
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARK ASSIST OFF
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, after the vehicle has been
started and shifted out of PARK (P), this
message displays to remind the driver that the
URPA system has been turned off. Press
the set/reset button or the trip odometer reset
stem to acknowledge this message and clear it
from the DIC display. To turn the URPA system
back on, see Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
This message displays while you are matching a
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to
your vehicle. See “Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
on page 235 for more information.
REPLACE BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
This message displays if a Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low. The battery
needs to be replaced in the transmitter. See
“Battery Replacement” under Remote Keyless
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger’s door is not fully closed and the
vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn off the
vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close
the door again. Check to see if the message
still appears on the DIC.
RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN
This message displays and a chime sounds if the
passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed
and the vehicle is in a drive gear. Stop and turn
off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and
close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC.
245
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING
SYSTEM
This message displays when the electronic
sensors that control the air conditioning and
heating systems are no longer working. Have the
climate control system serviced by your
dealer/retailer if you notice a drop in heating and
air conditioning efficiency.
On some vehicles, this message displays if there
is a problem with the battery charging system.
Under certain conditions, the charging system light
may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster.
Driving with this problem could drain the battery.
Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Have
the electrical system checked as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message displays if there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer
inspect the system for problems. See Airbag
on page 76 for more information.
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays along with the brake
system warning light if there is a problem with the
brake system. See Brake System Warning
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on
the DIC display. If the message is still displayed
or appears again when you begin driving, the
brake system needs service as soon as possible.
See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
If your vehicle has the All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
system, this message displays if there is a problem
with this system. If this message appears, stop
as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle.
Restart the vehicle after 30 seconds and check for
the message on the DIC display. If the message
is still displayed or appears again when you begin
driving, the AWD system needs service. See
your dealer/retailer.
246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
for service. The vehicle is safe to drive, however,
you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak®, so
reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST
If your vehicle has the Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system, this message displays
if there is a problem with the URPA system. Do
not use this system to help you park. See
page 188 for more information. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem
with the theft-deterrent system. The vehicle may or
may not restart so you may want to take the
vehicle to your dealer/retailer before turning off the
page 121 for more information.
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message displays when a problem is
detected with the power steering system. When
this message is displayed, you may notice that the
effort required to steer the vehicle increases or
feels heavier, but you will still be able to steer the
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
This message displays if a part on the Tire
Pressure Monitor (TPM) system is not working
properly. If you drive your vehicle while any of the
four sensors are missing or inoperable, the
warning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensor
would be missing, for example, if you put
different wheels on your vehicle without
transferring the sensors. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the
TPM. See your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays if there is a problem with
the StabiliTrak® system. If this message appears,
try to reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine
for at least 15 seconds; then start the engine
again. If this message still comes on, it means
there is a problem. See your dealer/retailer
247
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
STARTING DISABLED SERVICE
THROTTLE
This message displays when there is a problem
with the Traction Control System (TCS). When this
message is displayed, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
See your dealer/retailer for service. See
information.
This message displays when your vehicle’s throttle
system is not functioning properly. Have your
vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if the content theft-deterrent
system has detected a break-in attempt while
you were away from your vehicle. See Content
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays when there is a problem
with the transmission. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message may display along with the check
engine light on the instrument panel cluster if
the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly. See
page 381. The diagnostic system can determine
if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving
trips with the cap properly installed should turn this
light and message off.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions
related malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as
possible.
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (KM/H)
This message displays when your vehicle speed is
limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the
vehicle detects a problem in the speed variable
assist steering system. Have your vehicle serviced
by your dealer/retailer.
248
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead
to costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
This message displays when the Tire Pressure
Monitor (TPM) system is re-learning the tire
positions on your vehicle. See DIC Operation and
on page 235 for more information. The tire
positions must be re-learned after rotating the tires
or after replacing a tire or sensor. See Tire
information.
This message displays along with a continuous
chime if the transmission fluid in the vehicle
gets hot. Driving with the transmission fluid
temperature high can cause damage to the
vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the
transmission to cool. This message clears and
the chime stops when the fluid temperature
reaches a safe level.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving
for more information. This message clears itself
after 10 seconds.
TURN SIGNAL ON
This message displays and a chime sounds if a
turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km).
Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the off
position.
249
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The default settings for the customization features
were set when your vehicle left the factory, but
may have been changed from their default
state since then.
WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID
This message displays when the windshield
washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid
reservoir as soon as possible. See Engine
location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
for more information.
The customization preferences are automatically
recalled.
To change customization preferences, use the
following procedure.
Entering the Feature Settings Menu
DIC Vehicle Customization (With
DIC Buttons)
1. Turn the ignition on and place the vehicle in
PARK (P).
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities
that allow you to program certain features to
one preferred setting. Customization features can
only be programmed to one setting on the
vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred
setting for two different drivers.
To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it is
recommended that the headlamps are
turned off.
2. Press the customization button to enter the
feature settings menu. If the menu is not
available, FEATURE SETTINGS AVAILABLE
IN PARK will display. Before entering the
menu, make sure the vehicle is in PARK (P).
All of the customization options may not be
available on your vehicle. Only the options
available will be displayed on the DIC.
250
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISPLAY LANGUAGE
Feature Settings Menu Items
This feature allows you to select the language in
which the DIC messages will appear.
The following are customization features that allow
you to program settings to the vehicle:
Press the customization button until the DISPLAY
LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to access the
settings for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
DISPLAY IN ENGLISH
This feature will only display if a language other
than English has been set. This feature allows you
to change the language in which the DIC
messages appear to English.
Press the customization button until the PRESS V
ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in
TO DISPLAY IN ENGLISH, APPUYER V POUR
AFFICHAGE ANGLAIS in French, or PULSE
V PARA MOSTRAR INGLES in Spanish screen
appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset
button once to display all DIC messages in
English.
English.
FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French.
ESPANOL: All messages will appear in
Spanish.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
You can also change the language by pressing
the trip odometer reset stem. See “Language”
under DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC
Buttons) earlier in this section for more information.
251
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO DOOR LOCK
AUTO DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select when the
vehicle’s doors will automatically lock. See
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 107
for more information.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It
also allows you to select which doors and
when the doors will automatically unlock. See
Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 107
for more information.
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR
UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization
SHIFT OUT OF PARK (default): The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle is shifted out of
PARK (P).
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock.
AT VEHICLE SPEED: The doors will
automatically lock when the vehicle speed is
above 8 mph (13 km/h) for three seconds.
DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door
will unlock when the key is taken out of the
ignition.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
ALL AT KEY OUT: All of the doors will unlock
when the key is taken out of the ignition.
ALL IN PARK (default): All of the doors will
unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
252
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
HORN ONLY: The horn will sound on the second
press of the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
HORN & LIGHTS (default): The exterior lamps
will flash when you press the lock button on the
RKE transmitter, and the horn will sound when the
lock button is pressed again within five seconds of
the previous command.
REMOTE DOOR LOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of
feedback you will receive when locking the vehicle
with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
You will not receive feedback when locking
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors
are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
information.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK
This feature allows you to select the type of
feedback you will receive when unlocking the
vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. You will not receive feedback when
unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter
if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry
information.
Press the customization button until REMOTE
DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: There will be no feedback when you press
the lock button on the RKE transmitter.
LIGHTS ONLY: The exterior lamps will flash
when you press the lock button on the RKE
transmitter.
253
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until REMOTE
DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display.
Press the set/reset button once to access
the settings for this feature. Then press the
customization button to scroll through the following
settings:
after the last door is closed. You will hear three
chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is
in use. The key must be out of the ignition for
this feature to work. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the power door
lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE
page 107 for more information.
LIGHTS OFF: The exterior lamps will not flash
when you press the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter.
Press the customization button until DELAY
DOOR LOCK appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
LIGHTS ON (default): The exterior lamps will
flash when you press the unlock button on
the RKE transmitter.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
OFF: There will be no delayed locking of
the vehicle’s doors.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is
closed.
DELAY DOOR LOCK
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
This feature allows you to select whether or not
the locking of the vehicle’s doors and liftgate
will be delayed. When locking the doors and
liftgate with the power door lock switch and a door
or the liftgate is open, this feature will delay
locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
254
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EXIT LIGHTING
APPROACH LIGHTING
This feature allows you to select the amount of
time you want the exterior lamps to remain
on when it is dark enough outside. This happens
after the key is turned from ON to OFF.
This feature allows you to select whether or not to
have the exterior lights turn on briefly during
low light periods after unlocking the vehicle using
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
Press the customization button until EXIT
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until APPROACH
LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on.
OFF: The exterior lights will not turn on when you
unlock the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will
stay on for 30 seconds.
ON (default): If it is dark enough outside, the
exterior lights will turn on briefly when you unlock
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for
one minute.
The lights will remain on for 20 seconds or until
the lock button on the RKE transmitter is pressed,
or the vehicle is no longer off. See Remote
page 100 for more information.
2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for
two minutes.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
255
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
PARK TILT MIRRORS
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
select whether or not the outside mirror(s)
will automatically tilt down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R). See Outside Power
information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
CHIME VOLUME
This feature allows you to select the volume level
of the chime.
Press the customization button until PARK TILT
MIRRORS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
Press the customization button until CHIME
VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
OFF (default): Neither outside mirror will be tilted
down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
NORMAL (default): The chime volume will be set
to a normal level.
DRIVER MIRROR: The driver’s outside mirror will
be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud
level.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
PASSENGER MIRROR: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
BOTH MIRRORS: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle
is shifted into REVERSE (R).
256
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
If the automatic movement has already occurred,
and you put the key back in the ignition and
remove it again, the seat will stay in the original
exit position, unless a memory recall took
place prior to removing the key again.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
EASY EXIT SEAT
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
select your preference for the automatic easy exit
page 13 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
MEMORY SEAT RECALL
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT
SEAT appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for this
feature. Then press the customization button to
scroll through the following settings:
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
select your preference for the remote memory seat
page 13 for more information.
OFF (default): No automatic seat exit recall will
occur.
Press the customization button until MEMORY
SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings
for this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
ON: The driver’s seat will move back when the
key is removed from the ignition.
The automatic easy exit seat movement will only
occur one time after the key is removed from
the ignition.
OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will
occur.
257
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ON: The driver’s seat and outside mirrors will
automatically move to the stored driving position
when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed. See “Relearn
Remote Key” under DIC Operation and Displays
and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 235
for more information on matching transmitters
to driver ID numbers.
Press the customization button until REMOTE
START appears on the DIC display. Press
the set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization
button to scroll through the following settings:
OFF: The remote start feature will be disabled.
ON (default): The remote start feature will
be enabled.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this
feature. The current setting will remain.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
Choose one of the available settings and press
the set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
REMOTE START
FACTORY SETTINGS
If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to
turn the remote start off or on. The remote
start feature allows you to start the engine from
outside of the vehicle using the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. See ″Remote Vehicle
This feature allows you to set all of the
customization features back to their factory default
settings.
258
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the customization button until FACTORY
SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the
set/reset button once to access the settings for
this feature. Then press the customization button
to scroll through the following settings:
If you do not exit, pressing the customization
button again will return you to the beginning of the
feature settings menu.
Exiting the Feature Settings Menu
The feature settings menu will be exited when any
of the following occurs:
RESTORE ALL (default): The customization
features will be set to their factory default settings.
• The vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
• The vehicle is no longer in ON.
DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features
will not be set to their factory default settings.
• The trip/fuel or vehicle information DIC buttons
are pressed.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
set/reset button while it is displayed on the DIC
to select it.
• The end of the feature settings menu is
reached and exited.
EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS
• A 40 second time period has elapsed with no
selection made.
This feature allows you to exit the feature
settings menu.
Press the customization button until FEATURE
SETTINGS PRESS V TO EXIT appears in
the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to
exit the menu.
259
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself
with its features.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or killed.
Always keep your eyes on the road and
your mind on the drive — avoid engaging
in extended searching while driving.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a
page 322. By taking a few moments to read this
manual and get familiar with your vehicle’s
audio system, you can use it with less effort, as
well as take advantage of its features. While your
vehicle is parked, set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio stations, setting the
tone and adjusting the speakers. Then, when
driving conditions permit, you can tune to
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. Here are some ways in which you can help
avoid distraction while driving.
your favorite stations using the presets and
steering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
260
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD
player, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way
radio, make sure that it can be added by
checking with your dealer/retailer. Also, check
federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be
added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or
other systems, and even damage them. Your
vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added.
Setting the Time
MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a Single
CD and DVD Player
If your vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD
and DVD player, it has a H (clock) button for setting
the time and date.
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC (accessory) or
RUN. Press the power knob, located in the
center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the clock button and the HR, MIN, MM,
DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and
year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of
the labels that you want to change. Every time
the pushbutton is pressed again, the time or
the date if selected, increases by one.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio
system can be played even after the ignition
is turned off. See Retained Accessory Power
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or
the \ FWD (forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left © SEEK arrow or s REV (reverse)
button, or turn the f knob, located on the
upper right side of the radio, to adjust the
selected setting.
261
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player
If your vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD
player, the radio has a MENU button instead of
the H (clock) button to set the time and date.
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting
from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow
these instructions:
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
1. Press the MENU button.
1. Press the clock button and then the
pushbutton located under the forward arrow
that is currently displayed on the radio screen
until the time 12H (hour) and 24H (hour),
and the date MM/DD (month and day)
and DD/MM (day and month) displays.
2. Once the clock option displays, press the
pushbutton located under that label. The
HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one
of the labels that you want to change. Every
time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time
or the date if selected, increases by one.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired option.
3. Press the clock button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
• Another way to increase the time or date,
is to press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or
the \ FWD (forward) button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the left
SEEK arrow or the REV (reverse) button.
You can also turn the tune knob, located on
the upper right side of the radio, to adjust
the selected setting.
262
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Time and Date Default
Settings
Radio with CD
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting
from month/day/year to day/month/year, follow
these instructions:
1. Press the MENU button. Once the clock
option displays, press the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow that is
currently displayed on the radio screen until
the 12H (hour) and 24H (hour), and the
date MM/DD (month and day) and DD/MM
(day and month) displays.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the
desired option.
Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)
similar
3. Press the MENU button again to apply the
selected default, or let the screen time out.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
263
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system relies upon receiving specific
Playing the Radio
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. While the radio is
tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or
call letters appear on the display. In rare cases, a
radio station can broadcast incorrect information
that causes the radio features to work improperly. If
this happens, contact the radio station.
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). When
SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts
to compensate for road and wind noise as you
speed up or slow down while driving. That way, the
volume level should sound about the same as
you drive.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
To activate SCV:
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO
VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
264
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired
Speed Compensated Volume setting
4(Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
button to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or
MP3 song. A choice of additional information
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT
(category) can appear. Continue pressing the
information button to highlight the desired label, or
press the pushbutton positioned under any one
of the labels and the information about that
label displays.
(OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select the level
of radio volume compensation. Press the
pushbutton located below the BACK label on
the MENU SETUP display or let the display
time out after approximately 10 seconds. Each
higher setting allows for more radio volume
compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The selection
displays.
When information is not available, No Info
displays.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to
your favorite stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls, if the
page 322.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
The radio seeks and scans only stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
265
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can
be programmed as favorites using the
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to
go through up to six pages of favorites, each
having six favorite stations available per page.
Each page of favorites can contain any
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
combination of AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped)
stations. To store a station as a favorite, perform
the following steps:
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons
until a beep sounds. When that pushbutton
is pressed and released, the station that was
set, returns.
programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio
station you want stored as a favorite.
266
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ
button until Manual displays or start to manually
adjust the bass, midrange, or treble by pressing
the tune knob.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or
Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,
press the tune knob until the tone control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under
the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. You can also adjust the highlighted setting
by pressing either the SEEK, FWD or REV
button until the desired levels are obtained. If a
station’s frequency is weak or if there is static,
decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker
control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the
tune knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust
the highlighted setting. You can also adjust the
highlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,
FWD (forward), or REV (reverse) button until
the desired levels are obtained.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to select
preset equalization settings.
267
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following:
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM
CAT label.
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™
frequency displays. Press the CAT button to
display the category labels on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
3. Rotate the tune knob to display the category
you want removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
Remove label until the category name
along with the word Removed displays.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the
desired category label to immediately tune
to the first XM™ station associated with that
category.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the pushbutton under the Add label when a
removed category is displayed or by pressing the
pushbutton under the Restore All label.
3. Rotate the tune knob, press the buttons below
the right or left arrows displayed, or press the
right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next
or previous XM™ station within the selected
category.
You cannot remove or add categories while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
268
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Messages
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your
vehicle and it must be returned to your
dealer/retailer for service.
LOAD ^: Press this button to load CDs into the
CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the load button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into
the slot, label side up. The player pulls the
CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error
cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
1. Press and hold the load button for
two seconds. A beep sounds and Load
All Discs displays.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
section for further detail.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to
insert the discs. The CD player takes up to
six CDs.
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
3. Press the Load button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player pulls it in and the CD should begin
playing.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or
radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
269
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
displays.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the
quality of the music that has been recorded, and the
way the CD-R has been handled. There can be an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,
and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these
problems occur, check the bottom surface of the
CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such as
cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD does not
play properly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see
information.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD(s). To eject the CD that is currently playing,
press and release this button. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If
the CD is not removed, after several seconds,
the CD is automatically pulled back into the player
and begins playing.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the
eject button for two seconds to eject all discs.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged
CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While
using the CD player, use only CDs in good
condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading
slot free of foreign materials, liquids, and
debris.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD that is currently playing.
270
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To play the tracks from the single CD in random
order, press the pushbutton positioned under
the RDM label until Random Current Disc is
displayed. Press the pushbutton again to turn
off random play.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to
go to the start of the current track, if more than
ten seconds on the CD have been played. Press
the right SEEK arrow to go to the next track. If
either SEEK arrow is held, or pressed multiple
times, the player continues moving backward or
forward through the tracks on the CD.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a six-disc CD
player, press and hold the LOAD button. A
beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
Insert one or more discs partway into the slot of
the CD player.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within a track.
You will hear sound at a reduced volume. Release
this button to resume playing the track. The elapsed
time of the track displays.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the radio for
future listening.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the
tracks can be listened to in random, rather than
sequential order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc
CD player. To use random, do one of the following:
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon and a
message showing disc and/or track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “no input device found” displays.
• Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD
player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the
CD player. A RDM label displays.
271
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good CD.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the
radio displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting
the problem.
If you have a radio with a six-disc CD player, it
has the capability of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R
or CD-RW disc. For more information on how
to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see
“Using an MP3” in the index.
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
CD Messages
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3
player, CD changer, or cassette tape player, etc. to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
for audio listening.
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or
the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
information on driver distraction.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
• There could have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
272
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
input jack. When a device is connected, press the
radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio
from the device over the vehicle speakers.
Radio with CD and DVD
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to
do additional volume adjustments from the
portable device if the volume does not go loud or
soft enough.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
might want to stop it or turn it off.
If your vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear
more information on the vehicle’s RSE system.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when a portable audio device is playing.
Press this button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable audio
player. If a portable audio player is not
connected, “No input device found” displays.
273
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DVD player is the top slot on the radio
faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS
programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media (DTS
and DTS Digital Surround are registered
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and Canada.
XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk,
traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’s
programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in
order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™; In the U.S. at
www.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)
or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.).
Manufactured under license from
Dolby® Laboratories. Dolby® and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby® Laboratories.
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System
(RDS). The RDS feature is available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
This system relies upon receiving specific
information from these stations and only works
when the information is available. While the radio
is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station
name or call letters display. In rare cases, a radio
station can broadcast incorrect information that
causes the radio features to work improperly. If this
happens, contact the radio station.
1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).
Playing the Radio
O (Power/Volume): Press this knob to turn the
system on and off.
Turn this knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the volume.
274
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed Compensated Volume (SCV): The radio
has Speed Compensated Volume (SCV). When
SCV is on, the radio volume automatically adjusts
to compensate for road and wind noise as you
speed up or slow down while driving. That way, the
volume level should sound about the same as
you drive. To activate SCV:
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM, or XM™ (if equipped). The display shows
the selection.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Set the radio volume to the desired level.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left SEEK
arrow to go to the next or to the previous station
and stay there.
2. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
3. Press the pushbutton under the AUTO
VOLUM (volume) label on the radio display.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for a few seconds until a beep sounds. The
radio goes to a station, plays for a few seconds,
then goes to the next station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.
4. Press the pushbutton under the desired SCV
setting (OFF, Low, Med, or High) to select the
level of radio volume compensation. Press
the pushbutton located below the BACK label
on the MENU SETUP display or let the
display time out after approximately
The radio seeks and scans only stations with a
strong signal that are in the selected band.
10 seconds. Each higher setting allows for
more radio volume compensation at
faster vehicle speeds.
275
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the FAV button to go through up to
six pages of favorites, each having six favorite
stations available per page. Each page of favorites
can contain any combination of AM, FM, or
XM™ (if equipped) stations. To store a station as
a favorite, perform the following steps:
4(Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service,
MP3, and RDS Features): Press the information
button to display additional text information
related to the current FM-RDS or XM™ station, or
MP3 song. A choice of additional information
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, and CAT
(category) can appear. Continue pressing the
information button to highlight the desired label, or
press the pushbutton positioned under any one
of the labels and the information about that
label displays.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page
where you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons
until a beep sounds. When that pushbutton
is pressed and released, the station that was
set, returns.
When information is not available, No Info
displays.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio
station you want stored as a favorite.
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to
your favorite stations using the presets, favorites
button, and steering wheel controls, if the
page 322.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of
favorites pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can
be programmed as favorites using the
2. Press the pushbutton located below the
FAV 1-6 label.
six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station
frequency labels and by using the radio favorites
page button (FAV button).
276
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the tune knob for
more than two seconds until a beep sounds.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time
out, to return to the original main radio
screen showing the radio station frequency
labels and to begin the process of
EQ (Equalization): Press this button to choose
bass and treble equalization settings designed for
different types of music. The choices are pop,
rock, country, talk, jazz, and classical. Selecting
MANUAL or changing bass or treble, returns
the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
programming your favorites for the chosen
amount of numbered pages.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Unique EQ settings can be saved for each source.
If your radio has a Bose® audio system, the EQ
settings are either MANUAL or TALK.
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or
Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble,
press the tune knob until the tone control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired
label, or press the pushbutton positioned under
the desired label. Turn the tune knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. If a station’s frequency is weak or if there
is static, decrease the treble.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance
or fade, press the tune knob until the speaker
control labels display. Press the pushbutton
positioned under the desired label. Turn the tune
knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust
the highlighted setting. You can also adjust the
highlighted setting by pressing either the SEEK,
FWD, or REV button until the desired levels
are obtained.
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the
middle position, press the pushbutton positioned
under the BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than
two seconds. A beep sounds and the level
adjusts to the middle position.
277
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the
desired category label to immediately tune to
the first XM™ station associated with that
category.
3. Turn the tune knob, press the buttons below
the right or left arrows displayed, or press the
right or left SEEK buttons to go to the next or
previous XM™ station within the selected
category.
To quickly adjust both the balance and fade to the
middle position at one time, press the tune
knob for more than two seconds until a beep
sounds.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the
FAV button or BAND button to display your
favorites again.
If the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) is turned on, the
radio disables FADE and mutes the rear speakers.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed
through the setup menu. To remove an undesired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM
CAT label.
3. Turn the tune knob to display the category you
want removed.
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find
XM™ stations when the radio is in the XM™
mode. To find XM™ channels within a desired
category, perform the following:
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™
frequency displays. Press the CAT button to
display the category labels on the radio
display. Continue pressing the CAT button
until the desired category name displays.
Another way to navigate the category list is to
press the REV button or the FWD button.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the
Remove label until the category name
along with the word Removed displays.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
278
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing
the pushbutton under the Add label when a
removed category is displayed or by pressing the
pushbutton under the Restore All label.
Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or
CD Slot)
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing
(loading a disc into the system, depending on
media type and format ranges from 5 to 20 seconds
for a CD, and up to 30 seconds for a DVD to begin
playing).
You cannot remove or add categories while the
vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Radio Messages
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If
Calibration Error displays, it means that the radio
has not been configured properly for your
vehicle and it must be returned to your
dealer/retailer for service.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in
the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing
where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source. The CD is controlled by the buttons
on the radio faceplate or by the RSA unit. See
information. The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is the
DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck) of
the radio are compatible with most audio CDs,
CD-R, CD-RW, and MP3s.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error
cannot be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
When a CD is inserted, the text label DVD or CD
symbol appears on the left side of the radio
display. As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
section for further detail.
279
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be
reduced due to CD-R quality, the method of
recording, the quality of the music that has been
recorded, and the way the CD-R has been
handled. There can be an increase in skipping,
difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loading
and ejecting. If these problems occur, check the
bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CD
is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
Z CD (Eject): Press and release the CD eject
button to eject the CD that is currently playing
in the bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting
Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the
CD is not removed, after several seconds, the CD
is automatically pulled back into the player.
scratched, the CD does not play properly. If the
surface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the
disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD eject
button for more than five seconds to force the disc
to eject.
280
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release the DVD
eject button to eject the CD that is currently playing
in the top slot. You will hear a beep and Ejecting
Disc will be displayed. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc will appear on display. The CD can
be removed. If the CD is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD will be automatically
pulled back into the player.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within a track. You will
hear sound at a reduced volume. Release this
pushbutton to resume playing the track. The
elapsed time of the track displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within a track.
You will hear sound at a reduced volume.
Release this button to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the
disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD eject
button for more than five seconds to force the disc
to eject.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the
tracks can be listened to in random, rather
than sequential order. To play the tracks from the
CD, press the DVD/CD AUX button when not
sourced to the CD, or insert a disc partway into
the slot. A RDM label displays. Press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select tracks on the
CD that is currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current track, if more than
five seconds on the CD have been played. If less
than five seconds on the CD has played, the
previous track plays. Press the right SEEK arrow
to go to the next track. If either SEEK arrow is
held, or pressed multiple times, the player
continues moving backward or forward through the
tracks on the CD.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD or DVD is playing. The CD or
DVD remains inside the radio for future listening
or viewing entertainment.
281
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing the track or chapter number displays when
a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and
the system automatically searches for an auxiliary
input device, such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No aux
input device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD
slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
between the two sources and not indicate “No aux
input device”. If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through
all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear
information.
Audio Output
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time. An audio source is
defined as DVD slot, CD slot, XM™, FM/AM,
Front Auxiliary Jack, or Rear Auxiliary Jack.
Press the power button to turn the radio on. The
radio can be heard through all of the vehicle
speakers.
Front seat passengers can listen to the radio (AM,
FM, or XM) by pressing the BAND button or the
DVD/CD AUX button to select CD slot, DVD
slot, front or rear auxiliary input (if available).
If a playback device is plugged into the radio’s
front auxiliary input jack or the rear auxiliary jack,
the front seat passengers are able to listen to
playback from this source through the vehicle
speakers. See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)”
later in this section, or “Audio/Video (A/V)
page 305 for more information.
If a disc is inserted into top DVD slot, the rear seat
operator can turn on the video screen and use the
remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only)
through the remote control.
In some vehicles, depending on audio options, the
rear speakers can be muted when the RSA
power is turned on. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
on page 315 for more information.
282
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or
upside down.
Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or
CD-RW Disc
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an
hour and try again.
Your radio with CD and DVD has the capability of
playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc.
For more information on how to play an MP3/WMA
CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in
the index.
• There could have been a problem while
burning the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any
other reason, try a known good CD.
CD Messages
If these messages display and/or the CD comes
out, it could be for one of the following reasons:
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot
be corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the
radio displays an error message, write it down and
provide it to your dealer/retailer when reporting
the problem.
Optical Error: If the disc was inserted
upside down.
Disk Read Error: If a disc was inserted with an
invalid or unknown format.
Using the DVD Player
Player Error: If there are disc LOAD or disc
EJECT problems.
The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on
the remote control, or by the RSA system,
or by the buttons on the radio faceplate. See
“Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road.
When the road becomes smoother, the CD
should play.
The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of
the appropriate region code that is printed on
the jacket of most DVDs.
283
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most
audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along
with MP3 and WMA formats.
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear
information.
If an error message appears on the video screen
or the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages”
page 305 and “DVD Radio Error Messages” in this
section for more information.
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the radio on
or off. Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume. Press and hold the knob for more than
two seconds to turn off the entire radio and
Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system and to
start the parental control feature. Parental control
prevents the rear seat occupant from operating
the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote
control.
Playing a DVD
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No aux
input device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD
slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
between the two sources and not indicate “No aux
input device”. If a front auxiliary device is
A lock symbol appears next to the clock display.
The parental control feature remains on until
you press and hold this button for more than
two seconds again, or until the driver turns
the ignition off and exits the vehicle.
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through
all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
284
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to change tracks on a
CD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or to
change clock or date settings, while in the clock
or date setting mode. See the information
given earlier in this section specific to the radio,
CD, and the DVD. Also, see Setting the Time
on page 261, for setting the clock and date.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press this button to
fast forward the CD or DVD. The radio displays the
elapsed time and fast forwards five times the
normal speed. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button might not work when
the DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
© SEEK (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this
button to return to the start of the current track
or chapter. Press this button again to go to
the previous track or chapter. This button might
not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD or
DVD. If a CD or DVD is ejected, but not removed,
the player automatically pulls it back in after
15 seconds.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, because of an unknown format, etc.,
and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the
CD eject button for more than five seconds to force
the disc to eject.
SEEK ¨ (Next Track/Chapter): Press this
button to go to the next track or chapter. This
button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons
s REV (Reverse): Press this button to quickly
reverse the CD or DVD, at five times the normal
speed. The radio displays the elapsed time while in
fast reverse. To stop fast reversing, press this
button again. This button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing.
Press the pushbuttons located under any desired
tag option during DVD playback. See the tag
options listed below for more information.
285
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V
menus and controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat
information. The Video Screen automatically turns
on when the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the
choices that are highlighted in any menu.
y (Menu): Press this button to access the DVD
menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the pushbuttons located under the
navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through
the DVD menu. After making a selection press the
enter button. This button only operates when
using a DVD.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or
pause icon displayed on the radio system,
to toggle between pausing or restarting playback
of a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on
display, the system is in pause mode. If the pause
icon is showing on display, the system is in
playback mode. If the DVD screen is off, press the
play button to turn the screen on.
Nav (Navigate): Press this button to display
directional arrows for navigating through the
menus.
Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have
finished, although there could be a delay of up
to 30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing
the movie automatically, press the pushbutton
located under the play/pause symbol tag displayed
on the radio. If the DVD still does not play, refer
to the on-screen instructions, if available.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button operates only when a DVD is playing
and a menu is active.
286
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Nav (Navigate): Press this button to display
directional arrows for navigating through the
menus.
DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons
Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu
shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press
the pushbuttons located under any desired tag
option during DVD playback. See the tag options
listed below for more information.
e (Audio Stream): Press this button to cycle
through audio steam formats located on a DVD-A
disc. There is not any type of notification for the
customer to see through the radio display, but VSM
has a text field that shows audio stream changing.
The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A
menus and controls through the remote control.
See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat
information. The Video Screen does not
automatically power on when the DVD-A is
inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually
turned on by the rear seat occupant through
the remote control power button.
Inserting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc, with the label
side up, into the loading slot. The DVD player might
not accept some paper labeled media. The player
starts loading the disc into the system and display
“Loading Disc” on the radio display. At the same
time, the radio displays a softkey menu of option(s).
Some discs automatically play the movie while
others default to the softkey menu display which
requires the Play, Enter, or Navigation softkeys to
be pressed; either by softkey or by the rear seat
passenger using the remote control.
r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or
pause icon displayed on the radio system,
to toggle between pausing or restarting playback
of a DVD. If the forward arrow is showing on
display, the system is in pause mode. If the pause
icon is showing on display, the system is in
playback mode.
Loading a disc into the system, depending
on media type and format, ranges from
5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and up to 30 seconds
for a DVD.
q Group r: Press this button to cycle through
musical groupings on the DVD-A disc.
287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVD
player begins to play again. In case loading and
reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed
(unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold the DVD Eject button more
than 5 seconds to force the disc to eject.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a DVD without turning off the
system, press the stop button on the remote
control, or press the pushbutton located under the
stop or the play/pause symbol tags displayed
on the radio. If the radio head is sourced to
something other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CD
AUX button to make DVD-V the active source.
DVD Radio Error Messages
Player Error: This message displays when there
are disc load or eject problems.
To resume DVD playback, press the play/pause
button on the remote control, or press the
pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol
tag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resume
play from where it last stopped if the disc has not
been ejected and the stop button has not been
pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has
been ejected or the stop button has been pressed
twice on the remote control, the disc resumes
playing at the beginning of the disc.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the
disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side
up, or if the disc is damaged.
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the
disc is not from a correct region.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no
disc is present when the EJECT or DVD/CD AUX
button is pressed on the radio.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the eject button on the radio to eject the
disc. If a disc is ejected from the radio, but
not removed, the radio reloads the disc after a
short period of time. The disc is stored in the radio.
The radio does not resume play of the disc
automatically. If the RSA system is sourced to the
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack
located on the lower right side of the faceplate.
This is not an audio output; do not plug the
headphone set into the front auxiliary input jack.
You can however, connect an external audio
288
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
device such as an iPod, laptop computer, MP3
player, CD player, or cassette tape player, etc. to
the auxiliary input jack for use as another
source for audio listening.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a portable audio device is playing. The
portable audio device continues playing, so you
might want to stop it or power it off.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary
device while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See
information on driver distraction.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 1/8 inch
(3.5 mm) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary
input jack. When a device is connected, the radio
automatically begins playing audio from the
device over the vehicle speakers.
DVD/CD AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message
showing track or chapter number displays when a
disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the
system automatically searches for an auxiliary input
device, such as a portable audio player. If a
portable audio player is not connected, “No aux
input device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD
slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles
between the two sources and not indicate “No aux
input device”. If a front auxiliary device is
connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through
all available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under, Rear
information.
To listen to a device through the rear auxiliary input
over the speakers, cycle the DVD/CD Aux button
on the radio faceplate until “Rear Aux Input”
displays on the radio. The RSA or DVD Screen
must be on in order for the radio to source to rear
auxiliary.
O (Power/Volume): Turn this knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
volume of the portable player. You might need to do
additional volume adjustments from the portable
device if the volume does not go loud or soft
enough.
289
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3/WMA Format
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or
Six-Disc CD Player)
If you burn your own MP3/WMA disc on a
personal computer:
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
The radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be
recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable
bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when
recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA
files on one disc.
• The CD player is able to read and play a
maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and
a combined total of 512 folders and files.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy
to find songs while driving. Organize songs
by albums using one folder for each album.
Each folder or album should contain 18 songs
or less.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and
MP3/WMA files. By default the radio shows the
MP3 label on the left side of the screen but plays
both file formats in the order in which they
were recorded to the disc.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up
to eight subfolders deep, however, keep the
total number of folders to a minimum in
order to reduce the complexity and confusion
in trying to locate a particular folder during
playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl
extension (other file extensions might
not work).
290
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and
folders, or playlists can cause the player to be
unable to play up to the maximum number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish
to play a large number of files, folders, playlists
or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
folder, or playlist name. Long names also take
up more space on the display, potentially
getting cut off.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is
treated as a folder. If the root directory has
compressed audio files, the directory is displayed
as the CD label. All files contained directly
under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px)
are always accessed before root folders or files.
If a disc contains both uncompressed CD
audio (.CDA) and MP3/WMA files, a folder under
the root directory called CD accesses all of
the CD audio tracks on the disc.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it.
Trying to add music to an existing disc might
cause the disc not to function in the player.
Empty Directory or Folder
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and
next folder buttons, the tuner knob, or the seek
buttons. An MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW that was
recorded can also be played using no file folders.
If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the
maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and a
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only
folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
combined total of 512 folders and files, the player
lets you access and navigate up to the maximum,
but all items over the maximum are not accessible.
291
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When play enters a new folder, the display does
not automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default
display. The new track name displays.
No Folder
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only
compressed files, the files are located under the
root folder. The next and previous folder function
does not display on a CD-R or CD-RW that
was recorded without folders or playlists.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is
not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays
the file name without the extension (such
as .mp3) as the track name.
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlists
and compressed audio files, but no folders, all
files are located under the root folder. The folder
down and the folder up buttons search playlists
(Px) first and then goes to the root folder.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four
pages are shortened. Parts of words on the
last page of text and the extension of the filename
does not display.
Order of Play
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are
played in the following order:
Preprogrammed Playlists
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. When the last track
of the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first
folder and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each folder. When the last track of
the last folder has played, play continues
from the first track of the first folder.
292
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
does not play properly. If the surface of the CD is
page 320 for more information.
Playing an MP3/WMA
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot
(Single CD Player), or press the load button and
wait for the message to insert disc (Six-Disc
CD Player), label side up. The player pulls it in,
and the CD-R or CD-RW should begin playing.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known
good CD.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more
than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play scratched or
damaged CDs, the CD player could be
damaged. While using the CD player, use only
CDs in good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep the CD player
and the loading slot free of foreign materials,
liquids, and debris.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.
When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R
or CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.
If playing a CD-R or CD-RW, the sound quality
can be reduced due to CD-R or CD-RW quality,
the method of recording, the quality of the
music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R or CD-RW has been handled. There can be
an increase in skipping, difficulty in finding
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught
in the CD player. If a CD is recorded on a
personal computer and a description label is
needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD
with a marking pen.
tracks, and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If
these problems occur, check the bottom surface of
the CD. If the surface of the CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in
this section.
293
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z EJECT: Press the CD eject button to eject
CD-R(s) or CD-RW(s). To eject the CD-R or
CD-RW that is currently playing, press and release
this button. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc
displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed.
If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically
pulls back into the player and begins playing. For
the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold the eject
button for two seconds to eject all discs.
c T(Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button
to reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA
file. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release
this button to resume playing the file. The
elapsed time of the file displays.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within an
MP3/WMA file. Sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release this button to resume playing the
file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA
files on the CD-R or CD-RW currently playing.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more
than ten seconds have played. Press the
right SEEK arrow to go to the next MP3/WMA file.
If either SEEK arrow is held or pressed multiple
times, the player continues moving backward
or forward through MP3/WMA files on the CD.
RDM (Random): With the random setting,
MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be
listened to in random, rather than sequential order,
on one CD-R or CD-RW, or all discs in a six-disc
CD player. To use random, do one of the following:
• To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or
CD-RW in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Random
Current Disc displays. Press the same
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the
first track in the previous folder.
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
294
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press
the pushbutton located below either arrow button.
The CD goes to the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button
until the desired artist is displayed.
• To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label
until Randomize All Discs displays. Press the
same pushbutton again to turn off random play.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort
By label. From the sort screen, push one of the
buttons below the album button. Press the
pushbutton below the back label to return to the
main music navigator screen. Now the album name
displays on the second line between the arrows and
songs from the current album begins to play. Once
all songs from that album are played, the player
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on
the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3/WMA
files from that album.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music
navigator feature to play MP3/WMA files on the
CD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press
the pushbutton located below the music navigator
label. The player scans the disc to sort the files by
artist and album ID3 tag information. It might take
several minutes to scan the disc depending on the
number of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R or
CD-RW. The radio can begin playing while it is
scanning the disc in the background. When the
scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins
playing again.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
Once the disc has scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist. The
current artist playing is shown on the second line of
the display between the arrows. Once all songs by
that artist are played, the player moves to the next
artist in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW
and begins playing MP3/WMA files by that artist.
295
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio
when a CD is playing. The CD remains inside the
radio for future listening.
Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and
MP3/WMA files depending on which slot the disc
is loaded into. By default the radio reads only
the uncompressed audio (.CDA) and ignores the
MP3/WMA files on the DVD deck. On the CD
deck, pressing the CAT button toggles between
compressed and uncompressed audio format, the
default being the uncompressed format (.CDA).
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play
a CD when listening to the radio. The CD icon
and a message showing disc and/or track number
displays when a CD is in the player. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
MP3/WMA Format
If an MP3/WMA disc is burned on a personal
computer:
Using an MP3 (Radio with CD
and DVD Player)
• Make sure the MP3/WMA files are recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc.
MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3/WMA
files on one disc.
The radio plays MP3/WMA files that were recorded
on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be
recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps,
40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps,
112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps,
224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable
bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album display
when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Make sure the CD player (lower slot) is able
to read and play a maximum combination of
512 files and folders. The DVD player
(upper slot) is able to read 255 folders,
15 playlists and 40 sessions.
296
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Create a folder structure that makes it
easy to find songs while driving. Organize
songs by albums using one folder for each
album. Each folder or album should contain
18 songs or less.
• Finalize the audio disc before burning it. Trying
to add music to an existing disc can cause the
disc not to function in the player.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is
treated as a folder. If the root directory has
compressed audio files, the directory is displayed
as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly under
the root directory are accessed prior to any root
directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are
always accessed before root folders or files.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to
reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to
locate a particular folder during playback.
• Make sure playlists have a .m3u, .wpl or .pls
extension as other file extensions may
not work.
Empty Directory or Folder
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and
folders, or playlists can cause the player to be
unable to play up to the maximum number of
files, folders, playlists, or sessions. If you wish
to play a large number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions, minimize the length of the file,
folder, or playlist name. Long names also take
up more space on the display, potentially
getting cut off.
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only
folders/subfolders and no compressed files directly
beneath them, the player advances to the next
folder in the file structure that contains compressed
audio files. The empty folder does not display.
297
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No Folder
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. After the last track of the last folder
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first folder.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless the
folder mode was chosen as the default display. The
new track name displays.
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only
compressed files, the files are located under the
root folder. The next and previous folder function
does not function on a CD-R or CD-RW that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When
displaying the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
When the CD-R or CD-RW contains only playlists
and compressed audio files, but no folders, all files
are located under the root folder. The folder down
and the folder up buttons search playlists (Px)
first and then goes to the root folder. When the
radio displays the name of the folder the radio
displays ROOT.
File System and Naming
The song name that displays is the song name that
is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the
file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as
the track name.
Order of Play
Track names longer than 32 characters or four
pages are shortened. Parts of words on the last
page of text and the extension of the filename
displays.
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are
played in the following order:
• Play begins from the first track in the first
playlist and continues sequentially through
all tracks in each playlist. After the last track of
the last playlist has played, play continues
from the first track of the first playlist.
298
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player.
When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R
or CD-RW starts to play where it stopped, if it
was the last selected audio source.
Preprogrammed Playlists
Preprogrammed playlists that were created using
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™
software can be accessed, however, they cannot
be edited using the radio. These playlists are
treated as special folders containing compressed
audio song files.
As each new track starts to play, the track number
and song title displays.
Playing an MP3/WMA (In Either the DVD
or CD Slot)
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into either
the top or bottom slot, label side up. The player
pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW should
begin playing.
Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to
eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing in the bottom slot. A sound is heard and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R can be removed.
If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after
several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
Depending on the format of the disc, a softkey
menu appears and allows navigation of the disc.
The menu reads left to right as RDM (Randomize
song play order), a Folder icon with left and right
arrows (to move up or down through available
folders), a PL tag if the disc has a Playlist available,
and a Music Navigator tag. If a Playlist tag is
shown, toggling this key brings up a Folder softkey
only or the menu as previously described.
automatically pulls back into the player.
If loading and reading of a CD cannot be
completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the
disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for
more than five seconds to force the disc to eject.
299
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Z DVD (Eject): Press and release this
Sc (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the previous folder.
button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently
playing in the top slot. A sound is heard and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected,
Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can
be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed,
after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW
automatically pulls back into the player. If loading
and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such as
unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject,
press and hold this button for more than
cT (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first
track in the next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse playback quickly within an MP3/WMA file. A
sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this
button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time
of the file displays.
five seconds to force the disc to eject.
f (Tune): Turn this knob to select MP3/WMA files
on the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this
button to advance playback quickly within an
MP3/WMA file. A sound is heard at a reduced
volume. Release this button to resume playing the
file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left SEEK arrow to go to
the start of the current MP3/WMA file, if more than
five seconds have played. If less than five seconds
have played, the previous MP3/WMA file plays.
Press the right SEEK arrow to go to the next
MP3/WMA file. If either SEEK arrow is held, or
pressed multiple times, the player continues
moving backward or forward through the MP3/WMA
files on the CD.
300
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RDM (Random): With the random setting,
MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be
listened to in random, rather than sequential order.
To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW
you are listening to in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player
defaults to playing MP3/WMA files in order by artist.
The current artist playing is shown on the second
line of the display between the arrows. If you want
to listen to MP3/WMA files by another artist, press
the pushbutton located below either arrow button.
The disc goes to the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button
until the desired artist is displayed.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or
CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press the
pushbutton located below the music navigator label.
The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist
and album ID3 tag information. It might take
several minutes to scan the disc depending on the
number of MP3/WMA files recorded to the CD-R or
CD-RW.
To change from playback by artist to playback by
album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort
By label. From the sort screen, push one of the
buttons below the album button. Press the
pushbutton below the back label to return to the
main music navigator screen. Now the album name
is displayed on the second line between the arrows
and songs from the current album begin to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the
player moves to the next album in alphabetical
order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing
MP3/WMA files from that album.
To cancel music navigator while the player is
scanning, press the pushbutton located below the
music navigator label or eject the disc.
The radio can begin playing while it is
scanning the disc in the background. When the
scan is finished, the CD-R or CD-RW begins
playing again.
301
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3/WMA
playback.
If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the
two sources and not indicate “No Aux Input
Device”. If a front auxiliary device is connected,
the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all
available options, such as: DVD slot, CD slot,
Front Auxiliary, and Rear Auxiliary (if available).
See “Using the Auxiliary Input Jack(s)” later in this
section, or “Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks” under,
more information.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains
inside the radio for future listening or viewing
entertainment.
DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to
cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening
to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a
message showing track or chapter number
displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this
button again and the system automatically
searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
If a MP3/WMA is inserted into top DVD slot, the
rear seat operator can turn on the video screen
and use the remote control to navigate the
CD (tracks only) through the remote control.
302
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM Radio Messages
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
XM Updating
No XM Signal
Loading XM
Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
(after four second delay) text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air
Channel Unavail
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
Channel no longer
available
No Artist Info
No Title Info
No CAT Info
No Information
Artist Name/Feature not No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
available
The system is working properly.
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
Category Name not
available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
303
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Radio Display Message
Condition
Action Required
CAT Not Found
No channel available for There are no channels available for the selected category.
the chosen category
Theft lock active
The system is working properly.
XM Theftlocked
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
dealer/retailer.
XM Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
could be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
Check XM Receivr
XM Not Available
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer/retailer.
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your
dealer/retailer.
XM™ Not Available
304
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before You Drive
Navigation/Radio System
The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers
only. The driver cannot safely view the video
screen while driving and should not try to do so.
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
The navigation system has built-in features
intended to minimize driver distraction. Technology
alone, no matter how advanced, can never
replace your own judgment. See the Navigation
System manual for some tips to help you
reduce distractions while driving.
In severe or extreme weather conditions the
RSE system might not work until the temperature
is within the operating range. The operating
range for the RSE system is above −4°F (−20°C)
or below 140°F (60°C). If the temperature of
your vehicle is outside of this range, heat or cool
the vehicle until the temperature is within the
operating range of the RSE system.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat
Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system
works with the vehicle’s audio system. The
DVD player is part of the front radio. The RSE
system includes a radio with a DVD player, a video
display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless
headphones, and a remote control. See Radio with
on the vehicle’s audio/DVD system.
Parental Control
The RSE system may have a Parental Control
feature, depending on which radio you have.
To enable Parental Control, press and hold the
radio power button for more than two seconds to
stop all system features such as: radio, video
screen, RSA, DVD and/or CD. While Parental
Control is on, a padlock icon displays.
When the radio is turned back on, Parental
Control is unlocked.
305
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Push the power button to turn on the headphones.
An indicator light located on the headphones comes
on. If the light does not come on, the batteries might
need to be replaced. See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section for more information. Switch the
headphones to Off when not in use. Channel 1 is
dedicated to the video screen, while Channel 2 is
dedicated to RSA selections.
Headphones
Infrared transmitters are located at the rear of the
RSE overhead console. The headphones shut
off automatically to save the battery power if the
RSE system and RSA are shut off or if the
headphones are out of range of the transmitters
for more than three minutes. If you move too
far forward or step out of the vehicle, the
headphones lose the audio signal.
The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless
headphones that are dedicated to this system.
These headphones are used to listen to media
such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio,
any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or
the auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle has
this feature. The wireless headphones have an
On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume
control.
The headphones automatically turns off after
four hours of continuous use.
To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
volume control located on the right side.
306
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For optimal audio performance, the headphones
must be worn correctly. The symbol L (Left)
appears on the upper left side, above the ear pad
and should be positioned on the left ear. The
symbol R (Right) appears on the upper right side,
above the ear pad and should be positioned on
the right ear.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries on the headphones, do
the following:
1. Turn the screw with a coin or screw driver to
loosen the battery door located on the left
side of the headphones. Slide the battery
door open.
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat
or direct sunlight. This could damage the
headphones and repairs will not be covered by
your warranty. Keep the headphones stored
in a cool, dry place.
2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly,
using the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Replace the battery door and tighten the
door screw.
If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones
become worn or damaged, the pads can be
replaced separately from the headphone set
through your dealer/retailer for more information.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
Headphones should be stored in the front floor
console and not in the front seat back pocket.
Headphone damage can occur when the
second row seats are folded forward.
307
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system,
connect an external auxiliary device to the
color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary
device and the video screen power on. If the
video screen is in the DVD player mode, pressing
the AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote control
switches the video screen from the DVD
Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks
player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can
listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary
device by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio with CD
How to Change the RSE Video Screen
Settings
The A/V jacks located on the rear of the floor
console, allow audio or video signals to be
connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Adapter connectors or cables may be required to
connect the auxiliary device to the A/V jacks. Refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom),
screen brightness, and setup menu language
can be changed from the on screen setup menu.
To change any feature, do the following:
1. Press the display menu button on the remote
control.
The A/V jacks are color coded to match typical
home entertainment system equipment. The yellow
jack (A) is for the video input. The white jack (B) is
for the left audio input. The red jack (C) is for the
right audio input.
2. Use the remote control menu navigation
arrows and the enter button to use the
setup menu.
3. Press the display menu button again to
remove the setup menu from the screen.
Power for auxiliary devices is not supplied by the
radio system.
308
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio Output
Video Screen
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs can
be heard through the following possible sources:
The video screen is located in the RSE overhead
console.
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
To use the video screen, do the following:
1. Push the release button located on the RSE
overhead console.
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the rear
seat audio system, if your vehicle has this
feature.
2. Move the screen to the desired position.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up
into its locked position.
The RSE system always transmits the audio
signal to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” earlier in this
section for more information.
If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its
locked position, the screen remains on. This is
normal. The DVD continues to play through the
previous audio source. Use the remote control
power button or eject the disc to turn off the screen.
When a device is connected to the A/V jacks, or
the radio’s auxiliary input jack, if your vehicle
has this feature, the rear seat passengers are able
to hear audio from the auxiliary device through
the wireless or wired headphones. The front seat
passengers are able to listen to playback from
this device through the vehicle speakers by
selecting AUX as the source on the radio.
The RSE overhead console contains the IR
transmitters for the wireless headphones and the
IR receivers for the remote control. They are
located at the rear of the console.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video
screen, as damage may occur. See “Cleaning
the Video Screen” later in this section for
more information.
309
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control Buttons
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window at the rear of the RSE overhead console
and press the desired button. Direct sunlight
or very bright light can affect the ability of the RSE
transmitter to receive signals from the remote
control. If the remote control does not seem to be
working, the batteries might need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight can also
affect the function of the remote control.
If a CD or DVD is in the Radio DVD slot, the
remote control power button can be used to turn
on the video screen display and start the disc. The
radio can also turn on the video screen display.
for more information.
O (Power): Press this button to turn the video
screen on and off.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot
area or in direct sunlight can damage it,
and the repairs will not be covered by your
warranty. Keep the remote control stored in a
cool, dry place.
P (Illumination): Press this button to turn
on the remote control backlight. The backlight
automatically times out after 7 to 10 seconds if no
other button is pressed while the backlight is on.
v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to
the main menu of the DVD. This function can
vary for each disc.
310
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow
buttons to move the cursor around the DVD menu.
After making a selection, press the enter button.
This button only operates when using a DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start
playing a DVD. Press this button while a DVD is
playing to pause it. Press it again to continue
playing the DVD.
When the DVD is playing, depending on the radio,
you might be able to do slow play by pressing
the pause button then pressing the fast forward
button. The DVD continues playing in a slow play
mode. Depending on the radio, you might also
perform reverse slow play by pressing the pause
button and then pressing the fast reverse
button. To cancel slow play mode, press the
play/pause button.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use
the arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choice
that is highlighted in any menu.
z (Display Menu): Press this button to adjust
the brightness, screen display mode (normal,
full, or zoom), and display the language menu.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button
to return to the start of the current track or
chapter. Press this button again to go to the
previous track or chapter. This button might not
work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
q (Return): Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button operates only when the display menu
or a DVD menu is active.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing,
rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. Press this
button twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
u (Next Track/Chapter): Press this button to go
to the beginning of the next chapter or track. This
button might not work when the DVD is playing the
copyright information or the previews.
311
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to switch the
system between the DVD player and an auxiliary
source.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast
reverse the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing a
DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast
reversing a DVD audio or CD, release the fast
reverse button. This button might not work when the
DVD is playing the copyright information or the
previews.
d (Camera): Press this button to change camera
angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of
this function vary for each disc.
[ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast
forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding a
DVD video, press the play button. To stop fast
forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release the
fast forward button. This button might not work
when the DVD is playing the copyright information
or the previews.
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric
keypad provides the capability of direct chapter or
track number selection.
\ (Clear): Press this button within three seconds
after entering a numeric selection, to clear all
numeric inputs.
e (Audio): Press this button to change audio
tracks on DVDs that have this feature when
the DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function vary for each disc.
} 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers greater than
nine. Press this button before entering the number.
If the remote control becomes lost or damaged,
a new universal remote control can be purchased.
If this happens, make sure the universal remote
control uses a code set of Toshiba®.
{ (Subtitles): Press this button to turn ON/OFF
subtitles and to move through subtitle options
when a DVD is playing. The format and content of
this function vary for each disc.
312
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Problem
Recommended Action
The remote control does
not work.
Check to make sure there
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
To change the remote control batteries, do the
following:
1. Remove the battery compartment door
located on the bottom of the remote control.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the
compartment. Make sure that they are
installed correctly, using the diagram on the
inside of the battery compartment.
incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I If the stop button was
push Play but sometimes pressed one time, the
the DVD starts where I
DVD player resumes
3. Close the battery door securely.
left off and sometimes at playing where the DVD
the beginning.
was stopped. If the stop
button was pressed two
times the DVD player
begins to play from the
beginning of the DVD.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long
period of time, remove the batteries and keep them
in a cool, dry place.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Problem
No power.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
turned on or in accessory.
The picture does not fill the Check the display mode
screen. There are black
borders on the top and
settings in the setup menu
by pressing the display
bottom or on both sides or menu button on the remote
it looks stretched out.
control.
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
313
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Display Error Messages
Problem
Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
The DVD display error message depends on
which radio you have. The video screen may
display one of the following:
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Disc Load/Eject Error: This message displays
when there are disc load or eject problems.
Check that the
headphones are on
correctly using the L (left)
and R (right) on the
headphones.
Disc Format Error: This message displays, if the
disc is inserted with the disc label wrong side
up, or if the disc is damaged.
I lost the remote and/or the See your dealer/retailer for
Disc Region Error: This message displays, if the
disc is not from a correct region.
headphones.
assistance.
The DVD is playing, but
there is no picture or
sound.
Check that the RSE video
screen is sourced to the
DVD player.
No Disc Inserted: This message displays, if no
disc is present when the EJECT button is pressed
on the radio.
314
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Distortion
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Video distortion may occur when operating cellular
phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position
Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or
walkie talkies.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to
and control any of the music sources: radio, CDs,
DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However, the rear
seat passengers can only control the music sources
the front seat passengers are not listening to
(except on some radios where dual control is
allowed). For example, rear seat passengers can
listen to and control a CD through the headphones,
while the driver listens to the radio through the front
speakers. The rear seat passengers have control of
the volume for each set of headphones.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
*Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console
When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface,
use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water.
You can operate the RSA functions even when
the main radio is off.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Audio can be heard through wired headphones
(not included) plugged into the jacks on the RSA.
If your vehicle has this feature, audio can also
be heard on Channel 2 of the wireless
headphones.
When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean
cloth dampened with clean water. Use care
when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as
damage could result.
The audio system mutes the rear speakers when
the RSA audio is active through the headphones.
315
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or
XM™ (if equipped), press the left seek arrow or
the right seek arrow to go to the previous or to the
next station or channels and stay there. This
function is inactive, with some radios, if the front
seat passengers are listening to the radio.
Press and hold the left seek arrow or right seek
arrow until the display flashes, to tune to an
individual station. The display stops flashing after
the buttons have not been pushed for more
than two seconds. This function is inactive, with
some radios, if the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio.
While listening to a disc, press the right seek
arrow to go to the next track or chapter on the disc.
Press the left seek arrow to go back to the start
of the current track or chapter (if more than
ten seconds have played). This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat passengers
are listening to the disc.
P(Power): Press this button to turn the RSA on
or off.
Volume: Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume of the wired headphones.
The left knob controls the left headphones and the
right knob controls the right headphones.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between the radio (AM/FM), XM (if equipped), CD,
and if your vehicle has these features, DVD,
front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed,
press the left seek arrow or right seek arrow to
perform a cursor up or down on the menu.
Hold the left seek arrow or right seek arrow to
perform a cursor left or right on the menu.
316
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the
next preset radio station or channel set on the
main radio. This function is inactive, with
some radios, if the front seat passengers are
listening to the radio.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If your vehicle has audio
steering wheel controls,
they could differ
depending on the
vehicle’s options. Some
audio controls can
be adjusted at
the steering wheel.
They include the
following:
When a CD or DVD audio is playing, press this
button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD
audio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if
the front seat passengers are listening to the disc.
When a disc audio is playing in the CD or DVD
changer, press this button to select the next disc, if
multiple discs are loaded. This function is inactive,
with some radios, if the front seat passengers are
listening to the disc.
xw (Next/Previous): Press the up or the down
arrow to go to the next or to the previous radio
station stored as a favorite.
When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press
the PROG button to perform the menu function,
enter.
While a CD/DVD is playing, press the up or the
down arrow to go to the next or previous track or
chapter.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works
automatically by learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN). If the radio is
moved to a different vehicle, it does not operate
and LOCKED displays.
317
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch
between the radio (AM, FM), XM™ (if equipped),
CD, and if your vehicle has these features,
DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary.
g (Mute/Voice Recognition): Press and release
this button to silence the vehicle speakers only.
The audio of the wireless and wired headphones, if
your vehicle has these features, does not mute.
Press and release this button again, to turn
the sound on.
+ e − e (Volume): Press the plus or minus
button to increase or to decrease the radio volume.
If your vehicle has the navigation system, press
and hold this button briefly to initiate voice
recognition. See “Voice Recognition” in the
Navigation System manual for more information.
If your vehicle has OnStar®, press and hold
this button briefly to interact with the OnStar®
system. If your vehicle also has the navigation
system, press and hold this button briefly to initiate
voice recognition and say “OnStar” to enter
page 145 in this manual for more information.
¨ (Seek): Press the seek arrow to go to the
next radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™
(if equipped). Press this button to go to the next
track or chapter while sourced to the CD or
DVD slot.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur
during normal radio reception if items such as cell
phone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories,
and external electronic devices are plugged
into the accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the item from the
accessory power outlet.
318
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
The range for most AM stations is greater than for
FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. For
better radio reception, most AM radio stations
boosts the power levels during the day, and then
reduce these levels during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and power lines
interfere with radio reception. When this happens,
try reducing the treble on your radio.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,
tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy
foliage, bridges, garages, or through tunnels could
cause loss of the XM™ signal for a period of
time. The radio might display NO XM SIGNAL to
indicate interference.
FM Stereo
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals
only reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
319
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Multi-Band Antenna
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from
direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,
or scratched, the CD does not play properly or not
at all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a
soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in
a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process
starts from the center to the edge.
The multi-band antenna is located on the roof of
your vehicle. This type of antenna is used with the
AM/FM radio, as well as OnStar® and the XM™
Satellite Radio Service System, if your vehicle has
these features. Keep this antenna clear of snow
and ice build up for clear radio reception. If
your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
radio system may be affected if the sunroof is
open. Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle
can interfere with the performance of the radio
system and, if your vehicle has this feature,
OnStar®. Make sure the multi-band antenna is not
obstructed.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while
handling it; this could damage the surface. Pick up
CDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens
of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the
CD mechanism.
320
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready
for anything.” On city streets, rural roads,
or expressways, it means “Always expect
the unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians
or other drivers are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate what they
might do and be ready. Rear-end collisions
are about the most preventable of
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in
your vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow
enough following distance. Defensive
driving requires that a driver concentrate
on the driving task. Anything that distracts
from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can
even cause a collision, with resulting
injury. Ask a passenger to help do these
things, or pull off the road in a safe place to
do them. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
322
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the
adult population — choose never to drink alcohol,
so they never drive after drinking. For persons
under 21, it is against the law in every U.S.
state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and
driving is a national tragedy. It is the number one
contributor to the highway death toll, claiming
thousands of victims every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle:
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink
alcohol and then drive. But what if people do?
How much is “too much” if someone plans
to drive? It is a lot less than many might think.
Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information on the problem.
• Judgment
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
more than 300,000 people injured.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of
someone who is drinking depends upon
four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
323
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would
reach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce
(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks if
each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors like
whiskey, gin, or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For
example, if the same person drank three double
martinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)
within an hour, the person’s BAC would be close
to 0.12 percent. A person who consumes food
just before or during drinking will have a somewhat
lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women
generally have a lower relative percentage of body
water than men. Since alcohol is carried in body
water, this means that a woman generally will
reach a higher BAC level than a man of her same
body weight will when each has the same
number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout
Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In
some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and
Germany. The BAC limit for all commercial drivers
in the United States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have
seen, it depends on how much alcohol is in the
drinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.
324
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC
of 0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving
skills of many people are impaired at a BAC
There is something else about drinking and driving
that many people do not know. Medical research
shows that alcohol in a person’s system can make
crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the
brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when
anyone who has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance
of being killed or permanently disabled is
higher than if the person had not been drinking.
approaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects are
worse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAC
levels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that the
chance of being in a collision increases sharply for
drivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.
A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent has
doubled his or her chance of having a collision. At a
BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driver
having a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of
0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the
alcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or number
of cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful”
is not the right answer. What if there is an
emergency, a need to take sudden action, as when
a child darts into the street? A person with even a
moderate BAC might not be able to react quickly
enough to avoid the collision.
dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,
attentiveness, and judgment can be
affected by even a small amount of
alcohol. You can have a serious — or even
fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in
a cab; or if you are with a group, designate
a driver who will not drink.
325
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of
a second. But that is only an average. It might be
less with one driver and as long as two or
three seconds or more with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight
all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,
a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your
vehicle while driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when driving on snow or
ice, it is easy to ask more of those control
systems than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle. See
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary
greatly with the surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of the road,
whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the
condition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force applied.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time. First, you have to decide to push on
the brake pedal. That is perception time. Then
you have to bring up your foot and do it. That is
reaction time.
326
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by
heavy braking — rather than keeping pace with
traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes might
not have time to cool between hard stops. The
brakes will wear out much faster if you do a lot of
heavy braking. If you keep pace with the traffic
and allow realistic following distances, you
will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That
means better braking and longer brake life.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System
(ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that
will help prevent a braking skid.
When you start the engine and begin to drive
away, ABS will check itself. You might hear
a momentary motor or clicking noise while this test
is going on, and you might even notice that the
brake pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are
driving, brake normally but do not pump the
brakes. If you do, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you will still have
some power brake assist. But you will use it
when you brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it can take longer to stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Antilock Brake
on page 218.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories
327
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make
the most of available tire and road conditions. This
can help you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of
you. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the brakes at each
wheel.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving
updates on wheel speed and controls braking
pressure accordingly.
328
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
StabiliTrak® System
Remember: ABS does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal
or always decrease stopping distance. If you get
too close to the vehicle in front of you, you will not
have time to apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
Your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® system which
combines antilock brake, traction and stability
control systems and helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to
drive away, the system performs several diagnostic
checks to ensure there are no problems. You
may hear or feel the system working. This
is normal and does not mean there is a problem
with your vehicle. The system should initialize
before the vehicle reaches 20 mph (32 km/h).
In some cases, it may take approximately
two miles of driving before the system initializes.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake
pedal down firmly and let antilock work for you.
You might hear the antilock pump or motor
operate, and feel the brake pedal pulsate, but this
is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the
StabiliTrak® light along with one of the following
messages will be displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROL
OFF, SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL,
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
SERVICE STABILITRAK. If you see these
conditions, turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds,
and then turn it back on again to reset the system.
329
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of these messages still appear on the Driver
Information Center (DIC), your vehicle should
be taken in for service. For more information on
the DIC messages, see Driver Information
The traction control part of StabiliTrak® can be
turned off by pressing and releasing the traction
control disable button.
Traction control can be turned on by pressing and
releasing the traction control disable button if
not automatically shut off for any other reason.
The StabiliTrak® light
will flash on the
instrument panel cluster
when the system is
both on and activated.
When the traction control system is turned off, the
StabiliTrak® light and the appropriate traction
control off message will be displayed on the DIC
to warn the driver. Your vehicle will still have
brake-traction control when traction control is off,
but will not be able to use the engine speed
management system. See “Traction Control
Operation” next for more information.
You may also feel or hear the system working;
this is normal.
When the traction control system has been turned
off, you may still hear system noises as a result
of the brake-traction control coming on.
The traction control
disable button is located
on the instrument
panel below the climate
controls.
It is recommended to leave the system on for
normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if your vehicle is stuck in
sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to
“rock” your vehicle to attempt to free it. It may also
be necessary to turn off the system when driving
in extreme off-road conditions where high
wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is
330
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reduce engine power and do not spin the
wheel(s) excessively while these lights and this
message are displayed.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the
StabiliTrak® system. Traction control limits wheel
spin by reducing engine power to the wheels
(engine speed management) and by applying
brakes to each individual wheel (brake-traction
control) as necessary.
The traction control system may activate on
dry or rough roads or under conditions such as
heavy acceleration while turning or abrupt
upshifts/downshifts of the transmission. When
this happens, you may notice a reduction in
acceleration, or may hear a noise or vibration.
This is normal.
The traction control system is enabled
automatically when you start your vehicle. It will
activate and the StabiliTrak® light will flash if
it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction while driving. If you turn
off traction control, only the brake-traction
control portion of traction control will work. The
engine speed management will be disabled. In this
mode, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely.
This can cause the brake-traction control to
activate constantly.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the StabiliTrak® light will flash and the
cruise control will automatically disengage.
When road conditions allow you to use cruise
again, you may re-engage the cruise control. See
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting
the vehicle, you should see your dealer/retailer
for service.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle
to spin excessively while the StabiliTrak®, ABS
and brake warning lights and the SERVICE
STABILITRAK message are displayed,
you could damage the transfer case. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
331
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Tips
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
It is important to take curves at a reasonable
speed.
If your vehicle has this feature, engine power is
sent to all four wheels when extra traction is
needed. This is like four-wheel drive, but there is
no separate lever or switch to engage or
disengage the front axle. It is fully automatic, and
adjusts itself as needed for road conditions.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents
mentioned on the news happen on curves.
Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is
subject to the same laws of physics when driving
on curves. The traction of the tires against the
road surface makes it possible for the vehicle to
change its path when you turn the front wheels. If
there is no traction, inertia will keep the vehicle
going in the same direction. If you have ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
When using a compact spare tire on your AWD
equipped vehicle, the AWD system automatically
detects the presence of the compact spare and the
AWD is disabled. To restore the AWD operation
and prevent excessive wear on the clutch in your
AWD system, replace the compact spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible. See Compact
The traction you can get in a curve depends on
the condition of the tires and the road surface, the
angle at which the curve is banked, and your
speed. While you are in a curve, speed is the one
factor you can control.
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the
engine stops or the system is not functioning, you
can steer but it will take much more effort.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to
do their work where the tires meet the road.
332
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more
effective than braking. For example, you come
over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or
a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a
child darts out from between parked cars and
stops right in front of you. You can avoid these
problems by braking — if you can stop in time. But
sometimes you cannot; there is not room. That
is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up
on the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
way you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you
should adjust your speed. Of course, the posted
speeds are based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable conditions you will
want to go slower.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking
on page 326. It is better to remove as much speed
as you can from a possible collision. Then steer
around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while
the front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”
through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady
speed. Wait to accelerate until you are out of
the curve, and then accelerate gently into
the straightaway.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories
333
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your vehicle’s right wheels have
dropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulder
while you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention
and a quick decision. If you are holding the
steering wheel at the recommended 9 and
3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without removing either
hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you
have avoided the object.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the
way, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge
of the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel
up to one-quarter turn until the right front tire
contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering
wheel to go straight down the roadway.
The fact that such emergency situations are
always possible is a good reason to practice
defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts
properly.
334
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
usually indicates it is all right to pass, providing
the road ahead is clear. Never cross a solid
line on your side of the lane or a double solid
line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple
maneuver?
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want
to pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces
your area of vision, especially if you are
following a larger vehicle. Also, you will not
have adequate space if the vehicle ahead
suddenly slows or stops. Keep back a
reasonable distance.
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,
since the passing vehicle occupies the same
lane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. A
miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a
brief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenly
put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on
collision.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming
up, start to accelerate but stay in the right
lane and do not get too close. Time your move
so you will be increasing speed as the time
comes to move into the other lane. If the way
is clear to pass, you will have a running
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the
sides, and to crossroads for situations
that might affect your passing patterns. If you
have any doubt whatsoever about making
a successful pass, wait for a better time.
start that more than makes up for the distance
you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel
your pass, you need only slow down and drop
back again and wait for another opportunity.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,
and lines. If you can see a sign up ahead
that might indicate a turn or an intersection,
delay your pass. A broken center line
335
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow
vehicle, wait your turn. But take care that
someone is not trying to pass you as you pull
out to pass the slow vehicle. Remember to
glance over your shoulder and check the
blind spot.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say
about what happens when the three control
systems — brakes, steering, and
acceleration — do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
shoulder, and start your left lane change signal
before moving out of the right lane to pass.
When you are far enough ahead of the passed
vehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s inside
mirror, activate the right lane change signal and
move back into the right lane. Remember that
an outside convex mirror makes the vehicle you
just passed seem farther away from you than it
really is.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or
area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking
reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and
by not overdriving those conditions. But skids
are always possible.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
The three types of skids correspond to your
vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,
the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or
cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a
curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle
causes the driving wheels to spin.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too
rapidly. Even though the brake lamps are not
flashing, it might be slowing down or starting
to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
336
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to
be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night
vision problems, or by fatigue.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you
want the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly
enough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always be
ready for a second skid if it occurs.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,
ice, gravel, or other material is on the road. For
safety, you want to slow down and adjust your
driving to these conditions. It is important to slow
down on slippery surfaces because stopping
distance is longer and vehicle control more limited.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, slow down and
keep more space between you and other
vehicles.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering,
acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle
speed by shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden
changes could cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize
warning clues — such as enough water, ice, or
packed snow on the road to make a mirrored
surface — and slow down when you have
any doubt.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe
place and rest.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
337
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice as
much light to see the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your
vehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night is
made much worse by dirt on the glass. Even
the inside of the glass can build up a film caused
by dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle and
flash more than clean glass would, making the
pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the
day in bright sunshine you are wise to wear
sunglasses. Your eyes will have less trouble
adjusting to night. But if you are driving, do not
wear sunglasses at night. They might cut down on
glare from headlamps, but they also make a lot
of things invisible.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as the headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your
eyes be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer
from night blindness — the inability to see in dim
light — and are not even aware of it.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or
even several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust
to the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,
as from a driver who does not lower the high
beams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,
slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
338
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is always wise to go slower and be cautious if
rain starts to fall while you are driving. The surface
may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even
if the windshield wiper blades are in good
shape, a heavy rain can make it harder to see
road signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,
the edge of the road, and even people walking.
It is wise to keep windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep the windshield washer
fluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace
windshield wiper inserts when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the windshield,
or when strips of rubber start to separate from the
inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On
a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or
turn as well because your vehicle’s tire-to-road
traction is not as good as on dry roads. And, if the
tires do not have much tread left, you get even
less traction.
339
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION:
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can
build up under the tires that they can actually ride
on the water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast enough. When
your vehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They
may not work as well in a quick stop and
may cause pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
the tires do not have much tread or if the
pressure in one or more is low. It can happen if a
lot of water is standing on the road. If you can
see reflections from trees, telephone poles,
or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’s
surface, there could be hydroplaning.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car wash, apply the brake pedal
lightly until the brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or
even going through some car washes can cause
problems, too. The water may affect the brakes.
Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow
down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to slow down
when it is raining.
340
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
CAUTION: (Continued)
Notice: If you drive too quickly through
deep puddles or standing water, water can
come in through the engine’s air intake
and badly damage the engine. Never drive
through water that is slightly lower than the
underbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoid
deep puddles or standing water, drive
through them very slowly.
water can carry away a smaller vehicle. If
this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore
police warning signs, and otherwise be
very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
Driving Through Flowing Water
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra
following distance. And be especially careful
when you pass another vehicle. Allow yourself
more clear room ahead, and be prepared to
have your view restricted by road spray.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. If you try to drive through flowing
water, as you might at a low water
crossing, your vehicle can be carried
away. As little as six inches of flowing
• Have good tires with proper tread depth. See
CAUTION: (Continued)
341
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
City Driving
Freeway Driving
One of the biggest problems with city streets is
the amount of traffic on them. Watch out for what
the other drivers are doing and pay attention
to traffic signals.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads. But
they have their own special rules.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city
driving:
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.
Drive at the same speed most of the other drivers
are driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks
a smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on
a freeway as a passing lane.
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip
into an unknown part of the city just as you
would for a cross-country trip.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads
to the freeway. If you have a clear view of the
freeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, you
should begin to check traffic. Try to determine
where you expect to blend with the flow. Try to
merge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.
Switch on the turn signal, check the mirrors, and
glance over your shoulder as often as necessary.
Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A
traffic light is there because the corner is
busy enough to need it. When a light turns
green, and just before you start to move,
check both ways for vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may be running the
red light.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your
speed to the posted limit or to the prevailing
rate if it is slower. Stay in the right lane unless you
want to pass.
342
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before changing lanes, check the mirrors. Then,
use the turn signal.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If
you must start when you are not fresh — such
as after a day’s work — do not plan to make too
many miles that first part of the journey. Wear
comfortable clothing and shoes you can easily
drive in.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly
over your shoulder to make sure there is not
another vehicle in your blind spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make sure
you allow a reasonable following distance.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it
needs service, have it done before starting out. Of
course, you will find experienced and able
service experts at dealers/retailers all across North
America. They are ready and willing to help you
if needed.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your
exit, do not, under any circumstances, stop and
back up. Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite
sharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce
your speed according to the speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you might tend to think
you are going slower than you actually are.
343
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Highway Hypnosis
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir
Is there actually such a condition as highway
hypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at the
wheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack of
awareness, or whatever.
full? Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you
checked all levels?
There is something about an easy stretch of road
with the same scenery, along with the hum of
the tires on the road, the drone of the engine, and
the rush of the wind against the vehicle that
can make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you!
If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in
less than a second, and you could crash and be
injured.
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses
clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough
for long-distance driving? Are the tires
all inflated to the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather
outlook along your route? Should you
delay your trip a short time to avoid a major
storm system?
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,
be aware that it can happen.
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
344
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Then here are some tips:
Hill and Mountain Roads
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your vehicle’s mirrors
and instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get
some exercise, or both. For safety, treat
drowsiness on the highway as an emergency.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different
from driving in flat or rolling terrain.
345
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that
can make your trips safer and more enjoyable.
{CAUTION:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check
all fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,
cooling system, and transmission. These parts
can work hard on mountain roads.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with
the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes
will have to do all the work of slowing
down. They could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none going down a
hill. You could crash. Always have the
engine running and your vehicle in gear
when you go downhill.
{CAUTION:
If you do not shift down, the brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine assist
the brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let the engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when
you go down a steep or long hill.
346
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled
car or an accident.
• You might want to put winter emergency
supplies in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a
red cloth, and a couple of reflective warning
triangles. And, if you will be driving under severe
conditions, include a small bag of sand, a
piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly
secure these items in your vehicle.
• You might see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling
rocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to these
and take appropriate action.
347
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires
meet the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery
situation. You have a lot less traction, or grip, and
need to be very careful.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.
But wet ice can be even more trouble because it
can offer the least traction of all. You can get
wet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), and
freezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.
348
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,
blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you have ABS,
begin stopping sooner than you would on dry
page 327.
StabiliTrak® improves your ability to accelerate
when driving on a slippery road. Even with
StabiliTrak®, slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. Under certain conditions,
you might want to turn the traction control part of
the StabiliTrak® System off, such as when
driving through deep snow and loose gravel, to
help maintain vehicle motion at lower speeds. See
page 352.
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with
ice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patches
can appear in shaded areas where the
sun cannot reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass can remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice
ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try
not to brake while you are actually on the
ice, and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
349
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay
with your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do to summon
help and keep yourself and your passengers safe:
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police
that you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around
you. If you do not have blankets or extra
clothing, make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor mats —
anything you can wrap around yourself or
tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be
careful.
350
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run the engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the
{CAUTION:
accelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the
heat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.
You will need a well-charged battery to restart
the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on with
the headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO
(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you. You
cannot see it or smell it, so you might not
know it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of your
vehicle, especially any that is blocking the
exhaust pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start
the engine again and repeat this only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as
little as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as
you can. To help keep warm, you can get out of
the vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
351
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you
spin the wheels too fast while shifting
the transmission back and forth, you can
destroy the transmission.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want
to spin the wheels too fast. The method known as
rocking can help you get out when you are
stuck, but you must use caution.
For information about using tire chains on your
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
{CAUTION:
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Turn the
traction control part of the StabiliTrak® System off.
shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until
the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears.
Release the accelerator pedal while you shift, and
press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the
transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning
the wheels in the forward and reverse directions,
you will cause a rocking motion that could free
your vehicle. If that does not get your vehicle out
after a few tries, it might need to be towed
out. If your vehicle does need to be towed out,
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or
others could be injured. And, the
transmission or other parts of the vehicle
can overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fire or other damage. When
you are stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
352
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire and Loading Information Label
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar) of your
vehicle. With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
The tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
353
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
page 432.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity for your vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules,
and trailering tips.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
354
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 1
Description
Example 2
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
355
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification/Tire Label
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is
attached to the rear edge of the driver’s door.
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
The label shows the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The
combined weight of the driver, passengers, and
cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity
weight.
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
356
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To find out the actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station and
weigh your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else, they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they
will keep going.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the
Rating GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of your vehicle.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
unless you need to.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
357
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See
“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following in
this section.
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service if you need to have your disabled
vehicle towed. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 509.
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing
vehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehicle
manufacturer’s recommendations.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind
a motorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle
Towing” following.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they
can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering
professional for additional advice and
equipment recommendations.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your
vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a
motorhome. The two most common types of
recreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghy
towing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground) and “dolly towing” (towing
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as
you would prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle is
prepared to be towed. See Before Leaving on
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
358
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dinghy Towing
If you have a front-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be
dinghy towed from the front. These vehicles
may also be towed by putting the front wheels on
a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later in this section.
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it can
be dinghy towed from the front. You can also tow
these vehicles by placing them on a platform
trailer with all four wheels off of the ground. These
vehicles cannot be towed using a dolly.
For vehicles being dinghy towed, the vehicle
should be run at the beginning of each day and at
each RV fuel stop for about five minutes. This
will ensure proper lubrication of transmission
components. Put the IGN (Ignition) fuse in to start
the vehicle.
To tow your vehicle from the front with all four
wheels on the ground:
1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.
2. Turn the ignition to OFF.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. To prevent your battery from draining while
the vehicle is being towed, remove the IGN
(Ignition) fuse from the underhood fuse block.
5. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY.
359
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Shift your transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
7. Release the parking brake.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel-Drive Vehicles)
Notice: If you tow your vehicle without
performing each of the steps listed under
“Dinghy Towing,” you could damage the
automatic transmission. Be sure to follow all
steps of the dinghy towing procedure prior
to and after towing your vehicle.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged.
Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing
your vehicle.
Once you have reached your destination, do the
following:
All-wheel-drive vehicles must not be towed with
two wheels on the ground. To properly tow
these vehicles, they should be placed on a
platform trailer with all four wheels off of the
ground or dinghy towed from the front.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF and remove the
key from the ignition.
3. Reinstall the IGN (Ignition) fuse.
Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the front
drive wheels on the ground if one of the front
tires is a compact spare tire. Towing with
two different tire sizes on the front of the
vehicle can cause severe damage to the
transmission.
360
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles Only)
Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear
could damage it. Also, repairs would not
be covered by the warranty. Never have your
vehicle towed from the rear.
To tow your front-wheel-drive vehicle from the
front with two wheels on the ground:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
Do not tow your vehicle from the rear.
2. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for
towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
361
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle,
you should read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section. But
trailering is different than just driving your
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in
handling, acceleration, braking, durability and fuel
economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment
and drive properly, you can lose control
when you pull a trailer. For example, if the
trailer is too heavy, the brakes may not
work well — or even at all. You and your
passengers could be seriously injured.
You may also damage your vehicle; the
resulting repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Pull a trailer only if you
have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and
information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety
rules. Many of these are important for your safety
and that of your passengers. So please read
this section carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires
are forced to work harder against the drag of
the added weight. The engine is required
to operate at relatively higher speeds and under
greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
362
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a
trailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximum
posted speed for trailers, or no more than
55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on your
vehicle’s parts.
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you’ll be driving. A
good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to
shift the transmission to THIRD (3) or, if
necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions). See “Tow/Haul
Mode” later in this section.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a
hitch dealer/retailer about sway controls.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) your new vehicle is driven.
Your engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
Three important considerations have to do with
weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• And the total weight on your vehicle’s tires
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that
you tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.
This helps your engine and other parts of
your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
363
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press this button
on the console to
enable/disable the
tow/haul mode.
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. The
purpose of the Tow/Haul mode is to:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the
predictability of transmission shifts when
pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
A light on the instrument
panel will come on to
indicate that tow/haul
mode has been
• Improve control of vehicle speed while
requiring less throttle pedal activity when
pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
selected.
• Increase the charging system voltage to assist
in recharging a battery installed in a trailer.
Tow/Haul may be turned off by pressing the
button again, at which time the indicator light on
the instrument panel will turn off. The vehicle
will automatically turn off Tow/Haul every time it is
started.
364
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when
the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at
least 75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross Combined
Weight Rating (GCWR). See Weight of the
Trailer later in this section. Tow/Haul is most useful
under the following driving conditions:
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on
your vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the
vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer
Tongue” later in this section for more information.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or
heavy load through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or
heavy load in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or
heavy load in busy parking lots where
improved low speed control of the vehicle is
desired.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming
only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment. The weight
of additional optional equipment, passengers and
cargo in the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly
loaded or with no trailer at all will not cause
damage. However, there is no benefit to the
selection of Tow/Haul when the vehicle is
unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded may
result in unpleasant engine and transmission
driving characteristics and reduced fuel economy.
Tow/Haul is recommended only when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load.
365
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look in the following chart to find the maximum
trailer weight for your vehicle.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important
weight to measure because it affects the total
or gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle
Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the
vehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, and
the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If you
have a lot of options, equipment, passengers
or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And
if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your
Maximum
Trailer Weight
Package
*GCWR
Front-Wheel
Drive
4,500 lbs
(2 041 kg)
9,500 lbs
(4 309 kg)
4,500 lbs
(2 041 kg)
9,700 lbs
(4 400 kg)
All-Wheel Drive
*The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is
the total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your
vehicle should not be exceeded.
Ask your dealer/retailer for our trailering
information or advice, or write us at our Customer
Assistance Offices. See Customer Assistance
about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
366
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs
(2 495 kg); 2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle
and 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a
GVWR of 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg), a RGAWR of
4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a GCWR (Gross
Combination Weight Rating) of 14,000 lbs
(6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or a
weight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)
should weigh 10-15 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue, separately, to see if the
weights are proper. If they aren’t, you may be able
to get them right simply by moving some items
around in the trailer.
Trailering may also be limited by the vehicle’s ability
to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot
cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight
may reduce your trailering capacity more than the
total of the additional weight.
You can expect tongue weight to be at least
10 percent of trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and
because the weight is applied well behind the rear
axle, the effect on the rear axle will be greater than
just the weight itself, as much as 1.5 times as much.
The weight at the rear axle could be 850 lbs
(386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since the rear
axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg), adding
1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit
for RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up
to 8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
367
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with
some of the latest options and you have a front
seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with
some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well.
You may add 300 lbs (136 kg) to the front
axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle
weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs
(408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able to
handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of
total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle
does not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR,
GVWR, RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating
or Tongue Weight. The only way to be sure you
are not exceeding any of these ratings is to weigh
your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
may think that you should subtract 700 additional
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity to
stay within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer
would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go
further and think you must limit tongue weight to
less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding
GVWR. But, you must still consider the effect on the
rear axle. Because your rear axle now weighs
3,100 lbs (1 406 kg), you can only put 900 lbs
(408 kg) on the rear axle without exceeding
RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the
upper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers
on the Certification/Tire label. See Loading
go over the GVW limit for your vehicle, including
the weight of the trailer tongue.
368
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
Safety Chains
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough
roads are a few reasons why you’ll need the right
hitch. Here are some rules to follow:
You should always attach chains between your
vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains
under the tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will
not drop to the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do
not attach them to the bumper. Always leave just
enough slack so you can turn with your rig. And,
never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not
intended for hitches. Do not attach rental
hitches or other bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that does not
attach to the bumper.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body
of your vehicle when you install a trailer
hitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holes
later when you remove the hitch. If you
don’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.
and water can, too.
Trailer Brakes
If you tow more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg), use trailer
brakes. Because your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, don’t try to tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic
brake system. If you do, both brake systems
won’t work well, or at all.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the
trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
369
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving with a Trailer
Following Distance
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
experience. Before setting out for the open road,
you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaint
yourself with the feel of handling and braking with
the added weight of the trailer. And always
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is
now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead
as you would when driving your vehicle without
a trailer. This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a
good deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can
return to your lane.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer
moving and then apply the trailer brake controller
by hand to be sure the brakes are working.
This lets you check your electrical connection at
the same time.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one
hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,
just move that hand to the left. To move the trailer
to the right, move your hand to the right. Always
back up slowly and, if possible, have someone
guide you.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure
that the load is secure, and that the lamps and any
trailer brakes are still working.
370
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
when they are not. It’s important to check
occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while
trailering could cause the trailer to come in
contact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very sharp turns
while trailering.
Driving on Grades
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger
and load carrying vehicle. If you tow a trailer,
your vehicle will require more frequent
maintenance due to the additional load. Because
of the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s
engine may overheat on hot days, when going up
a long or steep grade with a trailer. If the engine
coolant temperature gage indicates overheating,
turn off the air conditioning to reduce engine load,
pull off the road and stop in a safe spot.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider
turns than normal. Do this so your trailer
won’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,
trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.
Check with your dealer/retailer. The arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a
turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer
lamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’re
about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before
you start down a long or steep downgrade. If you
don’t shift down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get hot and no
longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce
your speed to around 55 mph (88 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns even if the
bulbs on the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may
think drivers behind you are seeing your signal
371
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When the chocks are in place, release
the regular brakes until the chocks absorb
the load.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
You really should not park your vehicle,
with a trailer attached, on a hill. If
something goes wrong, your rig could
start to move. People can be injured, and
both your vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged.
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
• start your engine,
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here’s how to do it:
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P).
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the
chocks.
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away
from the curb. When parking downhill,
turn your wheels into the curb.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer
wheels.
372
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle will need service more often when
you’re pulling a trailer. See Scheduled
Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring
harness for towing a trailer.
Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, drive belt,
cooling system and brake system. Each of these
is covered in this manual, and the Index will
help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s
a good idea to review this information before
you start your trip.
Basic Trailer Wiring
The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin
connector, is located at the rear of the vehicle and
is tied to the vehicle’s frame. The harness
connector can be plugged into a seven-pin
universal heavy-duty trailer connector available
through your dealer/retailer.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and
bolts are tight.
373
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,
press the tow/haul mode button located at the
end of the shift lever. This will boost the vehicle
system voltage and properly charge the battery. If
the trailer is too light for tow/haul mode, you
can turn on the headlamps (Non-HID only) as a
second way to boost the vehicle system and
charge the battery.
• Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
• Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
• Brown: Taillamps
• White: Ground
• Light Green: Back-up Lamps
• Red: Battery Feed*
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat
during severe operating conditions. See Engine
• Dark Blue: Trailer Brake*
*The fuses for these two circuits are installed in
the underhood electrical center, but the wires
are not connected. They should be connected by
your dealer/retailer or a qualified service center.
374
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
376
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When you add non-Saturn accessories to your
vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags,
braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions
systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic
systems like anti-lock brakes, traction control,
and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not
covered by warranty.
Your dealer/retailer knows your vehicle best and
wants you to be happy with it. We hope you will go
to your dealer/retailer for all your service needs.
You will get genuine Saturn parts and
Saturn-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your Saturn vehicle
all Saturn. Genuine Saturn parts have one of
these marks.
Saturn accessories are designed to complement
and function with other systems on your vehicle.
Your Saturn retailer can accessorize your vehicle
using genuine Saturn accessories. When you go to
your Saturn retailer and ask for Saturn accessories,
you will know that Saturn-trained and supported
service technicians will perform the work using
genuine Saturn accessories.
377
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
CAUTION: (Continued)
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain
and/or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and
systems (including some inside the vehicle), many
fluids, and some component wear by-products
contain and/or emit these chemicals.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work,
you should use the proper service manual. It
tells you much more about how to service your
vehicle than this manual can. To order the proper
service manual, see Service Publications
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could
be damaged if you try to do service work
on a vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to do your own service work, see
page 91.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement
parts, and tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of any service
work you perform. See Maintenance Record
on page 500.
CAUTION: (Continued)
378
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted
octane rating of 87 or higher. For best performance
or trailer towing, you could choose to use middle
grade 89 octane unleaded gasoline. If the octane
rating is less than 87, you might notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive, commonly referred
to as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If
you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs
service.
Things you might add to the outside of your
vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This can
cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and
windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer/retailer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part
of the proper maintenance of your vehicle. To
help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum
vehicle performance, we recommend the use of
gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some
gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the
use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives
on page 380 for additional information.
379
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
However, some gasolines contain only the
California Fuel
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help
correct and prevent most deposit-related problems.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California
Emissions Standards, it is designed to operate on
fuels that meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control label. If this fuel is
not available in states adopting California
emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system
performance might be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and your vehicle might
fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator
your authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is
determined that the condition is caused by the
type of fuel used, repairs might not be covered by
your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as
ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines
might be available in your area. We recommend
that you use these gasolines, if they comply
with the specifications described earlier. However,
E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used
in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for
fuel that contains methanol. Do not use
fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal
parts in the fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage would
not be covered under your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives
that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits
from forming, allowing the emission control
system to work properly. In most cases, you
should not have to add anything to the fuel.
380
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you
buy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.
We recommend against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of
spark plugs and the performance of the emission
control system could be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid
injuries to you and others, read and follow
all the instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you are
refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not use
cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and
smoking materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the
law in some places. Do not re-enter the
vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children
away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other
fuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.
Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel would
not be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business
in the country where you will be driving.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged
fuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
381
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open the fuel door, push the rearward center
edge in and release. The door will pop open.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly
counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if
the cap is released too soon, it will spring back
to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from
the hook on the fuel door.
382
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center
(DIC), the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message will be
displayed if the fuel cap is not properly installed.
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and
then something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can happen if
your tank is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly
and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do
not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of
fuel by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant. Leave the
area immediately.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
the tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon
page 468.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to
get the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can
get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it
may not fit properly. This may cause your
malfunction indicator lamp to light and may
damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until
it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
page 222.
383
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container can ignite the
gasoline vapor. You can be badly burned
and your vehicle damaged if this occurs.
To help avoid injury to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup
bed, or on any surface other than the
ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before
operating the nozzle. Contact should
be maintained until the filling is
complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine
parts and start a fire. These include
liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,
windshield washer and other fluids, and
plastic or rubber. You or others could be
burned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping gasoline.
384
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Before closing the hood, be sure all filler caps are
on properly.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
Pull the hood down to close. Lower the hood until
the lifting pressure of the strut is reduced. Then
allow the hood to fall and latch into place under its
own weight. Check to make sure the hood is
closed. If the hood does not fully latch, gently push
the hood down at the front and center of the
hood until it is completely latched.
1. Pull the hood
release handle with
this symbol on it.
It is located
under the instrument
panel on the
driver’s side of the
vehicle.
2. At the front of the vehicle, pull up on the
center of the hood, and push the secondary
hood release to the right.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, gas
struts will automatically take over to lift and
hold the hood in the fully open position.
385
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Radiator Pressure Cap (Out of View). See
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time
you get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil
several minutes to drain back into the oil
pan. If you do not do this, the oil dipstick might
not show the actual level.
G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper
towel or cloth, then push it back in all the
way. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,
and check the level.
H. Automatic Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See
“Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic
I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake
K. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield
387
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See Engine
When to Add Engine Oil
on page 386 for the
location of the engine oil
fill cap.
I
quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.
This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating range in the
cross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the
proper operating range, the engine could be
damaged.
388
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• Oils meeting these
requirements should
have the starburst
symbol on the
container. This
symbol indicates that
the oil has been
certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst
symbol on the front of the oil container.
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as
meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing
the American Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to
use the recommended oil can result in engine
damage not covered by your warranty.
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only
an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
389
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide
easier cold starting and better protection for
the engine at extremely low temperatures.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message will come on. Change the oil as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It
is possible that, if you are driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system might not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a
year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine parts and reset the system. It is
also important to check the oil regularly and keep
it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM
Standard GM6094M are all you need for good
performance and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since
your last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter.
This is based on engine revolutions and engine
temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an oil change
will be indicated can vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you must reset the
system every time the oil is changed.
390
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has Driver Information Center (DIC)
buttons:
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to
change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system
so it can calculate when the next oil change is
required. If a situation occurs where you change the
oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
2. Press the vehicle information button until OIL
LIFE REMAINING displays.
3. Press and hold the set/reset button until 100%
is displayed. You will hear three chimes and
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
will go off.
message being turned on, reset the system.
If your vehicle does not have Driver Information
Center (DIC) buttons:
4. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes back on when you start your vehicle, the
engine oil life system has not reset. Repeat
the procedure.
1. Turn the ignition to ON, with the engine off.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to access
this display. Press the trip odometer reset
stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays.
2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem
until OIL LIFE REMAINING shows 100%. You
will hear three chimes and the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will go off.
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes back on when you start your vehicle,
the engine oil life system has not reset.
Repeat the procedure.
391
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Do with Used Oil
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can
be unhealthy for your skin and could even
cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay on your
skin for very long. Clean your skin and nails with
soap and water, or a good hand cleaner. Wash
or properly dispose of clothing or rags containing
used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil
products.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See
information. If you are driving in dusty/dirty
conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil
change.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it on the
ground, into sewers, or into streams or bodies of
water. Instead, recycle it by taking it to a place
that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your
dealer/retailer, a service station, or a local
recycling center for help.
for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
392
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
{CAUTION:
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filter
from the vehicle and lightly shake the filter
(away from vehicle) to release loose dust and dirt.
If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required.
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or others
to be burned. The air cleaner not only
cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not there and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,
do the following:
1. Loosen the screws that hold the cover on.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift off the cover.
4. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter element
and any loose debris that may be found in the
air cleaner base.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
damage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in
place when you are driving.
5. Inspect or replace the air filter element.
6. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the
cover and reconnect the electrical connector.
393
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can
damage your transmission. Too much can
mean that some of the fluid could come out
and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system
parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could
cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to
get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check the automatic transmission
fluid level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid at the intervals listed in Additional
use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
• When outside temperatures are above
90°F (32°C).
How to Check Automatic Transmission
Fluid
• At high speed for quite a while.
• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
• While pulling a trailer.
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you
may choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer
service department.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at
normal operating temperature, which is 180°F to
200°F (82°C to 93°C).
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could get a false reading
on the dipstick.
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about
15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures are
above 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to drive longer.
394
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
for more information on location.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare the vehicle as follows:
1. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean
rag or paper towel.
1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. Reinstall back in all the way, wait
three seconds and then pull it back out
again.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift
lever in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the
shift lever through each gear, pausing for
about three seconds in each one. Then,
position the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three to
five minutes.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these
steps:
The transmission fluid
dipstick cap has this
symbol on it, and
is located near the front
of the engine
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
crosshatched area.
compartment.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,
twist & lock dipstick cap in place.
395
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is
designed to remain in your vehicle for five years or
150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs
first, if you add only DEX-COOL® extended
life coolant.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of transmission fluid to use. See
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the
proper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched
area on the dipstick.
The following explains your cooling system and
how to add coolant when it is low. If you have
a problem with engine overheating or if you need
to add coolant to the radiator, see Engine
1. Remove the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at
the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It does not take much fluid, generally less
than one half of a pint (0.25 L). Do not overfill.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic
transmission fluid may damage your vehicle,
and the damages may not be covered by
your warranty. Always use the automatic
transmission fluid listed in Recommended
• Give freezing protection down
to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, twist
& lock dipstick cap in place.
396
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing sooner, at
the first maintenance service after each
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water
and one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will
not damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolant
mixture, you do not need to add anything else.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant
mixture, your engine could overheat and be
badly damaged. The repair cost would not be
covered by your warranty. Too much water
in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other parts.
397
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If coolant needs to be added more than four times
a year, have your dealer/retailer check the
cooling system.
Checking Coolant
The coolant recovery
tank cap has this
symbol on it.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or
additives in your vehicle’s cooling system, you
could damage your vehicle. Use only the
proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in
this manual for the cooling system. See
page 497 for more information.
for more information on the location of the
coolant recovery tank.
The vehicle must be on a level surface when
checking the coolant level.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should
be at the FULL COLD line or a little higher.
When the engine is warm, the level could be
above the FULL COLD level. The FULL COLD line
is marked on the coolant recovery tank.
398
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
If more coolant is needed, add the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolant
recovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty,
add coolant to the radiator. See Engine
{CAUTION:
Occasionally check the coolant level in the
radiator. For information on how to add coolant to
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out
and burn you badly. With the coolant
recovery tank, you will almost never
have to add coolant at the radiator. Never
turn the radiator pressure cap — even a
little — when the engine and radiator
are hot.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly
installed, coolant loss and possible engine
damage may occur. Be sure the cap is properly
and tightly secured.
for more information on location.
399
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Overheating
There is an engine coolant temperature gage on
your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you keep driving when the vehicles
engine is overheated, the liquids in it can
catch fire. You or others could be badly
burned. Stop your engine if it overheats,
and get out of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
Your vehicle may also have an ENGINE
OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE and ENGINE
OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE message displayed
in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
information on driving to a safe place in
an emergency.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can
burn you badly, even if you just open the
hood. Stay away from the engine if you see
or hear steam coming from it. Turn it off
and get everyone away from the vehicle
until it cools down. Wait until there is no
sign of steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because
you keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle
can be badly damaged. The costly repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. See
on page 402 for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
CAUTION: (Continued)
400
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you
can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for
about 10 minutes. If the warning does not come
back on, you can drive normally.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too
hot when you:
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park
your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and
get everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down.
Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” later in this section.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get
service help right away.
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest
fan speed and open the windows as
necessary.
3. If you are in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving — DRIVE (D) or LOW (L).
401
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is
what you will see:
This emergency operating mode lets your vehicle
be driven to a safe place in an emergency
situation. If an overheated engine condition exists,
an overheat protection mode which alternates
firing groups of cylinders helps prevent engine
damage. In this mode, there is a significant loss in
power and engine performance. The temperature
gage indicates an overheat condition exists.
Driving extended distances and/or towing a trailer
in the overheat protection mode should be
avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool before
attempting any repair. The engine oil will be
severely degraded. Repair the cause of coolant
loss, change the oil and reset the oil life
A. Engine Coolant Reservoir
B. Radiator Pressure Cap (covered)
C. Engine Cooling Fans
402
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the
hood can start up even when the engine
is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other
engine parts, can be very hot. Do not
touch them. If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If
you run the engine, it could lose all
coolant. That could cause an engine fire,
and you could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level
should be at least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it
is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap
or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator,
water pump or somewhere else in the cooling
system.
403
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,
check to see if the electric engine cooling fans
are running. If the engine is overheating, both fans
should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see
if coolant is visible in the coolant recovery tank.
If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or
above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant recovery tank, but be sure
the cooling system, including the coolant recovery
tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See
Notice: Engine damage from running your
engine without coolant is not covered by your
warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®
may cause premature engine, heater core, or
radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing sooner, at
30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot
cooling system can blow out and burn
you badly. They are under pressure, and if
you turn the radiator pressure cap — even
a little — they can come out at high
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
system and radiator pressure cap to cool
if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause your engine to overheat and
be severely damaged.
404
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can
boil before the proper coolant mixture will.
Your vehicle’s coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your
engine could get too hot but you would
not get the overheat warning. Your engine
could catch fire and you or others could
be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on
hot engine parts. Coolant contains
ethylene glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is
at the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle. If
the overheat warning continues, there is one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the
cooling system is cool before you do it.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts. Use the recommended coolant and
the proper coolant mixture.
405
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
for more information about the proper coolant
mixture.
1. To remove the panel that covers the radiator
cap, detach fasteners and lift off panel.
2. Remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap
slowly counterclockwise about one full turn.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
406
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL
COLD mark.
7. Start the engine and let it run until you can
feel the upper radiator hose getting hot.
Watch out for the engine cooling fan.
6. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
8. By this time, the coolant level inside the
radiator filler neck may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture through the filler neck until the
level reaches the base of the filler neck.
Replace the pressure cap.
At any time during this procedure if coolant begins
to flow out of the filler neck, reinstall the pressure
cap. Be sure to secure it tightly.
407
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
The power steering fluid
reservoir is located
1. Turn the key off and let the engine
compartment cool down.
toward the front of the
engine compartment
on the passenger’s side
of the vehicle. See
Overview on page 386
for reservoir location.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the
fluid level on the dipstick.
The fluid level should be somewhere within the
cross-hatched area on the dipstick. If the fluid is at
the ADD mark, you should add fluid.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power
steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in
the system or you hear an unusual noise. A
fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Always use the proper fluid.
Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage
your vehicle and the damages may not be
covered by your warranty. Always use the
correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants Recommended Fluids and
408
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions
for adding water.
When adding windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid
that has sufficient protection against freezing.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to
freeze and damage your washer fluid tank
and other parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as well
as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
When the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,
a WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message
will be displayed on the Driver Information Center
page 239 for more information.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is very cold.
This allows for fluid expansion if freezing
occurs, which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in
your windshield washer. It can damage
the vehicle’s windshield washer system
and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See
Overview on page 386
for reservoir location.
409
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add
fluid when the linings are worn, then you will have
too much fluid when you get new brake linings. You
should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,
only when work is done on the brake hydraulic
system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master
cylinder reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
on page 386 for the
location of the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it
can spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if
the engine is hot enough. You or others
could be burned, and your vehicle could be
damaged. Add brake fluid only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid
level in the reservoir might go down. The first
is that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptable
level during normal brake lining wear. When
new linings are put in, the fluid level goes back
up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out of
the brake system. If it is, you should have the
brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later the brakes will not work well.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System
410
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake system can
damage brake system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When you need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 497.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash it
off immediately. See Washing Your Vehicle
on page 468.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
system, the brakes may not work well.
This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
411
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied
or lightly applied. This does not mean something
is wrong with the brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the
brake pads are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be heard all
the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tighten
wheel nuts in the proper sequence to torque
page 483.
Brake linings should always be replaced as
complete axle sets.
{CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does
not return to normal height, or if there is a
rapid increase in pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out
brake pads could result in costly brake repair.
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without
the vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
412
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its
many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. Your vehicle was designed and tested
with top-quality brake parts. When you replace
parts of the braking system — for example, when
the brake linings wear down and you need
new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes
might not work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your
vehicle, the balance between the front and rear
brakes can change — for the worse. The braking
performance you have come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery.
When it is time for a new battery, see your
dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label.
For battery replacement, see your dealer/retailer
or the service manual. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
413
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for
25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)
cable from the battery. This will help keep the
battery from running down.
If your vehicle’s battery has run down, you may
want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use
the following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly
hurt if you are not careful. See Jump
around a battery without getting hurt.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly,
some or all of these things can hurt you.
414
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in
costly damage to your vehicle that would
not be covered by your warranty.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put
an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in NEUTRAL before
setting the parking brake. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the transfer
case is not in NEUTRAL.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or
pulling it will not work, and it could damage
your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a
12-volt battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other
accessories on during the jump starting
procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Always turn off your radio and other
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a
12-volt system with a negative ground,
both vehicles can be damaged. Only use
vehicles with 12-volt systems with negative
grounds to jump start your vehicle.
accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper
cables can reach, but be sure the vehicles are
not touching each other. If they are, it could
cause a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able to start your
vehicle, and the bad grounding could damage
the electrical systems.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.
Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into
the cigarette lighter or the accessory power
outlets. Turn off the radio and all lamps
that are not needed. This will avoid sparks
and help save both batteries. And it could
save the radio!
415
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Open the hoods and locate the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal locations on the
other vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote
positive (+) and a remote negative (−) jump
starting terminal. See Engine Compartment
the terminal locations.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Be sure the batteries have enough water.
You do not need to add water to the
ACDelco® battery (or batteries) installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is
there. If it is low, add water to take care of
that first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present.
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you need
more light.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn
you. Do not get it on you. If you
accidentally get it in your eyes or on your
skin, flush the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
CAUTION: (Continued)
416
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or
you will get a short that would damage
the battery and maybe other parts too. And do
not connect the negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the dead battery
because this can cause sparks.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can
injure you badly. Keep your hands away
from moving parts once the engine is
running.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to
the positive (+)
terminal of the dead
battery.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have
loose or missing insulation. If they do, you
could get a shock. The vehicles could
be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+)
will go to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part or to a remote negative (−)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
417
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote negative (−) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
The electrical connection is just as good
there, and the chance of sparks getting back
to the battery is much less.
Your vehicle has a remote negative (−)
terminal for this purpose.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the
negative (−) cable does not go to the dead
battery. It goes to a heavy, unpainted
metal engine part, or to a remote negative (−)
terminal on the vehicle with the dead
battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery
and run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead
battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical
shorting may occur and damage the vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Always connect and remove
the jumper cables in the correct order, making
sure that the cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
9. Connect the other
end of the
negative (−) cable at
least 18 inches
(45 cm) away from
the dead battery,
but not near engine
parts that move.
418
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both
vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from
the vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or
Remote Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and
Remote Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
419
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check Lubricant
All-Wheel Drive
Be sure to perform the lubricant checks described
in this section. There are two additional systems
that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
(A) Drain Plug (B) Filler Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
420
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug
hole, you will need to add some lubricant.
Add enough lubricant to raise the level to the
bottom of the filler plug hole. Use care not
to overtighten the plug.
Rear Drive Module
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to check the lubricant. See Scheduled
What to Use
How to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment.
However, if your vehicle is damaged in an
accident, the headlamp aim may be affected. Aim
adjustment to the low-beam headlamps may
be necessary if oncoming drivers flash their
high-beam headlamps at you (for vertical aim).
If you believe your headlamps need to be
re-aimed, it is recommend that you take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer for service.
(A) Filler Plug (B) Drain Plug
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
421
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has HID headlamps. After your
vehicle’s HID headlamp bulb has been replaced,
you may notice that the beam is a slightly different
shade than it was originally. This is normal.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Lighting
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and can burst if you drop or
scratch the bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions on the bulb package.
{CAUTION:
The high beam and low beam high
intensity discharge lighting system
operates at a very high voltage. If you try
to service any of the system components,
you could be seriously injured. Have your
dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
service them.
422
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull
the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse steps 1 – 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the
license plate lamps to the liftgate trim.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
License Plate Lamp
194
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer/retailer.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the lift gate trim opening.
423
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the proper size and type see Normal
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for
wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 488 for more information.
Backglass Wiper Blade
1. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the
backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not
lock in a vertical position, so care should
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. To replace the
wiper blade assembly, do the following:
be used when pulling it away from the vehicle.
2. Rotate the wiper blade assembly, hold
the wiper arm in position and push the blade
away from the wiper arm.
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
3. Replace the wiper blade.
4. Return the wiper arm and blade assembly to
the rest position on the glass.
2. Press the button in the middle of the wiper
arm connector, and pull the wiper blade
away from the arm connector.
3. Install the new wiper blade, and make sure
the wiper blade locks into place.
424
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your Saturn Warranty booklet
for details. For additional information refer to the tire
manufacturer’s booklet included with your vehicle.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a
pothole. Keep tires at the
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much friction. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
the tire’s tread is badly worn, or if
your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
425
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tire
sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates
that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sides of
the tire, although only one side may have the date
of manufacture.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
426
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature resistance. For more
page 442.
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare
tire or temporary use tire has a tread life of
approximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should
not be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).
The compact spare tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. If
your vehicle has a compact spare tire, see
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the
tread.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
Compact Spare Tire Example
427
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or
compact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi
(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressure
page 432.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a
typical passenger vehicle tire size.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and
numbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service description. The
letter T as the first character in the tire size means
the tire is for temporary use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have
a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all
federal safety guidelines.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set
by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to
sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as
shown in item C of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high as
it is wide.
428
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction;
the letter D means diagonal or bias ply
construction; and the letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
to its width.
inches.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
(F) Service Description: These characters
represent the load range and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to carry. The load index
can range from 1 to 279. The speed rating is
the maximum speed a tire is certified to carry a
load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 432.
429
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light
duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which can also identify
the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,
and date of production.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 353.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
positions.
430
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned
to a tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
page 440.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard. See
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs
(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See Loading
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
431
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to
a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see
your vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
432
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not
forget to check the compact spare tire, it should be
at 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional information
regarding the compact spare tire, see Compact
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses
radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure
levels. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each
tire and wheel assembly, except the spare
tire. TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure
readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial
tires may look properly inflated even when they
are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours
or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a low
tire pressure condition exists. If your vehicle has the
Driver Information Center (DIC), the driver can also
check tire pressure levels using the DIC.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
When a low tire pressure condition is detected,
the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning
symbol located on the instrument panel cluster.
433
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the DIC feature, a message
to check the pressure in a specific tire also
appears on the DIC display. The low tire pressure
warning symbol on the instrument panel cluster
and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
message on the DIC display appears at each
ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to
the correct inflation pressure. For additional
information and details about the DIC operation
and displays see DIC Operation and Displays
and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 235
a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety
feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with
a tire pressure
monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure
telltale when one
or more of your tires is
significantly
under-inflated.
You may notice, during cooler weather conditions,
the tire pressure monitor light, located on the
instrument panel cluster, and the CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE message appears when the vehicle is
first started and then turn off as you start to
drive the vehicle. This could be an early indicator
that the tire pressures are getting low and
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
434
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
The Tire and Loading Information label (tire
information placard) shows the size of your
vehicle’s original tires and the correct inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires when they
page 432. For the location of the tire and loading
information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 353.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately
one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace
normal tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your
vehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid
sealant can damage the tire pressure monitor
sensors.
435
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
more than five minutes to match all four tire and
wheel positions, the matching process stops
and you will need to start over.
Resetting the TPMS Identification
Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification
code. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or
replace one or more of the TPMS sensors,
the identification codes need to be matched to the
new tire/wheel position. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following
order: driver side front tire, passenger side front
tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side
rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined
below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON with the
engine off.
3. Using the DIC, press the vehicle information
button until the PRESS V TO RELEARN
TIRE POSITIONS message displays. If your
vehicle does not have the DIC buttons,
press the trip odometer reset stem located on
the instrument panel cluster until the
RELEARN TIRE POSITIONS message
displays.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing
the tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’s
air pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall. To
decrease air-pressure out of a tire you can use
the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style air
pressure gage, or a key.
4. If your vehicle has the DIC buttons, press the
set/reset button. The horn sounds twice to
indicate the TPMS receiver is ready, and the
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message
displays. If your vehicle does not have the
DIC buttons, press and hold the trip odometer
reset stem until the horn chirps twice and
the TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message
is displayed.
You have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than
two minutes to match the first tire and wheel, or
436
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver
side front turn signal lamp is on.
9. Proceed to the driver side rear tire. The driver
side rear turn signal lamp is on. Repeat the
procedure in Step 6. Instead of a single
horn chirp a double horn chirp signals the
TPMS sensor has been matched to this tire
and wheel position and the matching
process is no longer active.
6. Remove the valve cap from the valve
stem. Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure for
five seconds, or until a horn chirp sounds.
The horn chirp, which may take up to
30 seconds to sound, confirms that the sensor
identification code has been matched to this
tire and wheel position.
10. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
11. Set all four tires to the recommended air
pressure level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
7. Proceed to the passenger side front tire. The
passenger side front turn signal lamp is on.
Repeat the procedure in Step 6.
12. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.
If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,
the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM
message displays on the DIC screen. This
message should go off once you re-install the
road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
8. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire. The
passenger side rear turn signal lamp is on.
Repeat the procedure in Step 6.
437
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and Industry and Science
Canada
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency and complies with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your
tires as soon as possible and check wheel
alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.
more information.
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The
first rotation is the most important. See Scheduled
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
operates on a radio frequency and complies with
RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other
than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
438
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt
When rotating your tires, always use the correct
rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
439
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
When It Is Time for New Tires
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the
size or location of the damage.
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is
to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for
your vehicle. The original equipment tires
installed on your vehicle, when it was new, were
designed to meet General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)
system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM
strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to
give the same performance and vehicle safety,
during normal use, as the original tires.
You need a new tire if any of the following
statements are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more
places around the tire.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over
a dozen critical specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle, including
brake system performance, ride and handling,
traction control, and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM’s TPC Spec number is molded
onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.
If the tires have an all-season tread design,
• You can see cord or fabric showing through
the tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or
snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.
440
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the TPC spec number will be followed by an MS
for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 426 for additional information.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have a
crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on all
wheels. It is all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on your vehicle. See
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make
sure they are the same size, load range, speed
rating, and construction type (radial and
bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information label. This
label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar
for more information about the Tire and Loading
Information label and its location on your vehicle.
441
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
additional information.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size
than your original equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle performs,
including its braking, ride and handling
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags,
traction control, and stability control, the
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
performance of these systems can be affected.
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
{CAUTION:
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use
spare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are
selected. You may increase the chance
that you will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use Saturn specific wheel and
tire systems developed for your vehicle,
and have them properly installed by a
Saturn certified technician.
442
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While the tires available on General Motors
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform to
federal safety requirements and additional General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Temperature – A, B, C
Treadwear
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based
on the wear rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
443
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each new wheel should have the same
load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset and
be mounted the same way as the one it replaces.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular basis. However,
if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle
pulling to one side or the other, the alignment might
need to be checked. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with
new Saturn original equipment parts. This way,
you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels,
wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle
can be dangerous. It could affect the
braking and handling of your vehicle,
make your tires lose air and make you
lose control. You could have a collision in
which you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,
and wheel nuts for replacement.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace
it (except some aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailer if
any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
444
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause
problems with bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain clearance
to the body and chassis.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance
can cause damage to the brakes,
suspension or other vehicle parts. The area
damaged by the tire chains could cause
you to lose control of your vehicle and you
or others may be injured in a crash.
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Use another type of traction device
only if its manufacturer recommends it
for use on your vehicle and tire size
combination and road conditions. Follow
that manufacturer’s instructions. To help
avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,
readjust or remove the device if it is
contacting your vehicle, and do not spin
your vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on
the front tires.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has
been used or how far it has been driven. It
could fail suddenly and cause a crash. If
you have to replace a wheel, use a new
Saturn original equipment wheel.
445
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are
driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s
tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you
should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips
about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to
do maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided with your
vehicle is designed only for changing a
flat tire. If it is used for anything else, you
or others could be badly injured or killed
if the vehicle slips off the jack. Use the
jack provided with your vehicle only for
changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your
foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering
wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,
and then gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much
like a skid and may require the same correction
you would use in a skid. In any rear blowout
remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Get
the vehicle under control by steering the way
you want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy
and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
446
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel
damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on
your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. See Hazard
information.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front
and rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would be the tire,
on the other side, at the opposite end of the
vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The
vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or
fall on you or other people. You and they
could be badly injured or even killed. Find a
level place to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
jack and change a tire.
447
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Remove the wing bolt (B) by turning it
counterclockwise
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The tools needed to remove the spare tire are
located in the storage compartment on the driver
side, at the rear of the vehicle.
3. Push the jack (C) up out of the holding
bracket.
4. Turn the jack on its side, with the bottom
facing toward you.
1. Open the jack storage compartment by
squeezing down on the latch tab and
pulling the cover off.
5. Pull the jack straight out, bottom first.
A. Tool Bag
B. Wing Bolt
C. Jack
The tools you will be using include the jack (A)
and lug wrench (B).
448
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Open the storage compartment door of the
convenience center that is nearest the liftgate.
2. Move the carpet cutout that is located through
the hole of the storage compartment.
Removing the Spare Tire
The compact spare tire is located under the
vehicle, in front of the rear bumper. See Compact
about the compact spare.
3. Attach the lug wrench into the hoist shaft.
4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise to lower
the spare tire to the ground. Continue turning
the wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out
from under the vehicle.
A. Rear
Convenience
D. Hoist Shaft
E. Compact
Spare Tire
Center
B. Lug wrench
C. Storage
Compartment
Cap Hole
F. Retainer
G. Hoist Shaft
Assembly
5. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel
opening to remove the spare tire from the
cable.
449
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the cable
back up after removing the spare tire.
Do the following to check the cable:
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable is
visible.
Do not store a full-size or a flat road tire under
the vehicle. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing
page 451.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by
turning the lug wrench clockwise until you hear
two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
over-tighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
4. If the spare tire has not lowered, tighten the
cable all the way and then loosen it at least
two times.
If the spare tire did lower to the ground,
continue with Step 5 under “Removing the
Spare Tire (Vehicles with the Rear
Convenience Center)” listed previously.
5. If you still cannot lower the spare tire to the
page 456.
If the spare tire will not lower, the secondary latch
could be engaged.
450
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See
information.
2. If the vehicle has a wheel cover, loosen the
plastic nut caps with the wheel wrench. They
will not come off. Then, using the flat end
of the wheel wrench, pry along the edge of the
cover until it comes off. Be careful; the
edges may be sharp. Do not try to remove the
cover with your bare hands.
Store the wheel cover securely in the rear of
the vehicle until you have the flat tire
repaired or replaced.
3. Loosen the wheel nuts — but do not remove
them — using the lug wrench. For wheels
with a wheel lock key, use the wheel lock key
between the lock nut and lug wrench. The
key is supplied in the front passenger
door pocket.
If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove
the wheel nut caps using the wheel wrench.
Notice: If your vehicle has wheel locks and an
impact wrench is used to remove the wheel
nuts, the lock nut or wheel lock key could be
damaged. Do not use an impact wrench to
remove the wheel nuts if your vehicle has
wheel locks.
451
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked
up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off
the jack you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a vehicle when it
is supported only by a jack.
4. To identify the appropriate jacking location, find
the triangle (A) about 12 inches (30.5 cm) from
the front tire or (B) about 10.5 inches (27 cm)
from the rear tire.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack
improperly positioned can damage the
vehicle and even make the vehicle fall.
To help avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location before raising
the vehicle.
The triangle is located near each wheel on the
vehicle’s exterior.
Notice: If a jack is used to raise the vehicle
without positioning it correctly, your vehicle
could be damaged. When raising your vehicle
on a jack, avoid contact with the rear axle
control arms.
5. Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact
spare tire near you.
452
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Attach the lug wrench to the jack, and turn the
wrench clockwise to raise the jack head
3 inches (7.6 cm).
7. Place the jack under the vehicle as identified
in Step 3. Raise the vehicle by turning the lug
wrench clockwise in the jack. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the ground so that there
is enough room for the spare tire to fit
under the wheel well.
8. Remove all the wheel nuts and the flat tire.
9. Remove the plastic spare tire heat shield by
pulling the rubber latch. Store the plastic
spare tire heat shield. See Storing a Flat or
more information.
453
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10. Remove any rust or
dirt from the wheel
bolts, mounting
{CAUTION:
surfaces, and spare
wheel.
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts
to which it is fastened, can make the
wheel nuts become loose after time. The
wheel could come off and cause an
accident. When changing a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from the places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, a cloth or a paper towel can
be used to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
11. Install the compact spare tire.
12. Lower the vehicle by attaching the lug wrench
to the jack and turning the wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
Because the nuts might come loose. The
vehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing a
serious accident.
454
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly
tighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequence
and to the proper torque specification. See
the wheel nut torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel
to come loose and even come off. This
could lead to an accident. Be sure to use
the correct wheel nuts. If you have to
replace them, be sure to get new GM
original equipment wheel nuts. Stop
somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to
the proper torque specification. See
Capacities and Specifications on page 483
for wheel nut torque specification.
13. Tighten the wheel
nuts firmly in a
crisscross sequence,
as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your
vehicle’s compact spare. If you try to put a
wheel cover on the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
455
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch
system. It is designed to stop the compact spare
tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle if the
cable holding the spare tire is damaged. For the
secondary latch to work, the tire must be
stowed with the valve stem pointing down. See
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 459
for instructions on storing the spare tire correctly.
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If
the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind
you or on either side of you as you pull
the jack out from the under spare.
{CAUTION:
1. If the cable is not visible, start this procedure
at Step 3.
Before beginning this procedure read all
the instructions. Failure to read and follow
the instructions could damage the hoist
assembly and you and others could get
hurt. Read and follow the instructions
listed next.
456
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown
Front-Wheel-Drive Vehicle shown
2. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise until
approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is
exposed.
3. Attach the folding wrench to the jack and
raise the jack at least 10 turns.
4. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of
the jack under the center of the spare tire.
5. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the
jack until it lifts the secondary latch spring.
457
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Keep raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place.
This lets you know that the secondary
latch has released and the spare tire is
balancing on the jack.
8. Disconnect the folding wrench from the jack
and carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to
push against the spare tire while firmly pulling
the jack out from under the spare tire with the
other hand.
9. Tilt the retainer and slip it through the wheel
opening when the spare tire has been
completely lowered.
10. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the
cable back up if the cable is hanging.
7. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as
you can. You will not be able to store a spare tire
using the hoist assembly until it has been repaired
or replaced.
458
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing the Spare Tire
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment
in the passenger compartment of the
vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in the
proper place.
{CAUTION:
The underbody-mounted spare tire needs
to be stored with the valve stem pointing
down. If the spare tire is stored with the
valve stem pointing upwards, its
To store the spare tire:
1. Lay the compact spare tire near the rear of
the vehicle with the valve stem down.
secondary latch will not work properly
and the spare tire could loosen and
suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this
happened when your vehicle was being
driven, the tire might contact a person or
another vehicle, causing injury and, of
course, damage to itself as well. Be sure
the underbody-mounted spare tire is
stored with its valve stem pointing down.
2. Reinstall the plastic spare tire heat shield on
the compact spare tire.
3. If the vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove
the small center cap by tapping the back of
the cap with the extension of the shaft.
459
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Slide the cable retainer through the center of
the wheel and start to raise the compact
spare tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across
the underside of the wheel.
5. When the compact spare tire is almost in the
stored position, turn the tire so the valve is
toward the rear of the vehicle.
This position helps when checking the air
pressure in the compact spare tire.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of
the vehicle. Continue turning the lug wrench
until you feel more than two clicks. This
indicates that the compact spare tire is secure
and the cable is tight. The spare tire hoist
cannot be overtightened.
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push,
pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the
tire moves, use the lug wrench to tighten
the cable.
460
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the Flat Tire
Notice: Storing the full-size flat tire in the
underbody hoist system can expose it to heat
from the exhaust system. This can damage
the tire and underbody hoist system. Do
not store the full-size flat tire in the underbody
hoist system.
1. Remove the cable package from the jack
storage area.
2. Remove the small center cap by tapping the
back of the cap with the extension of the
shaft, if the vehicle has aluminum wheels.
3. Put the flat tire in the rear storage area with
the valve stem pointing toward the rear of the
vehicle.
4. Hook on end of the cable onto the outside
portion of the liftgate hinge opposite (B).
5. Pull the cable (A) through the door striker (E),
the center of the wheel (D), and the plastic
spare tire heat shield (C), as shown.
461
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Hook the other end
of the cable onto the
outside portion of
Storing the Tools
the liftgate hinge (B).
7. Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure.
8. Make sure the metal tube is centered at
the striker.
9. Push the tube
toward the front of
the vehicle.
A. Tool Bag
B. Wing Bolt
C. Jack
10. Close the liftgate and make sure it is latched
properly.
462
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Put back all tools as they were stored in the jack
storage compartment and put the compartment
cover back on.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when the vehicle was new, it can lose air after
a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. It
should be 60 psi (420 kPa).
1. Make that the bottom of the jack is facing
toward you.
2. Turn the jack (C) on its side and place it down
on the holding bracket.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,
stop as soon as possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles
(5 000 km), so you can finish your trip and have
the full-size tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to replace the
spare with a full-size tire as soon as possible. The
spare tire will last longer and be in good shape
in case it is needed again.
3. Reinstall the wing bolt (B) by turning it
clockwise.
4. To replace the cover, line up the tabs on the
bottom of the cover with the slots in the cover
opening. Push the cover in place, insuring
that the upper front and rear tabs are in
the opening and push the cover closed. Make
sure that the center latch is fully engaged.
This secures the cover in place.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The compact
spare can get caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and maybe
other parts of your vehicle.
Store the center cap or the plastic bolt-on wheel
covers until a full size tire is put back on the
vehicle. When you replace the compact spare with
a full-size tire, reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers
or the center cap. Hand-tighten them over
the wheel nuts, using the lug wrench.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
463
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
The All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system will be
automatically disabled when you use the compact
spare. To restore the AWD and prevent excessive
wear on the clutch in your AWD, replace the
compact spare tire with a full-size tire as soon as
possible.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and
garments that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color to your
vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use
cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces
being cleaned. Permanent damage may result
from using cleaners on surfaces for which
they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on
glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from
other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact
spare. Using them can damage your vehicle and
can damage the chains too. Do not use tire
chains on your compact spare.
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when
cleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or cause damage
to the rear window defogger. When cleaning
the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth
and glass cleaner.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its
best if it is cleaned often. Although not always
visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on your
upholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,
and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is
recommended to remove particles from your
upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled.
464
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to
all safety instructions on the label. While cleaning
your vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening your vehicle’s doors and
windows.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much soap will leave a
residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon
(3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result
from the use of many organic solvents such as
naptha, alcohol, etc.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and
knobs using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning
your vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,
you can also obtain a product from your
dealer/retailer to remove odors from your vehicle’s
upholstery.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be
used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For
soils, always try to remove them first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove
as much of the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
Do not clean your vehicle using the following
cleaners or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage
to your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub
aggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use of
heavy pressure can damage your interior and
does not improve the effectiveness of soil
removal.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
465
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To clean, use the following instructions:
Leather
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with
water or club soda.
A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap
solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steam
to clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spot
removers on leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never use
shoe polish on leather.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently
rub toward the center. Continue cleaning,
using a clean area of the cloth each time it
becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a
mild soap solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric
cleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When a
commercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be
used, test a small hidden area for colorfastness
first. If the locally cleaned area gives any
impression that a ring formation may result, clean
the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a
paper towel can be used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
466
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a
mild soap solution can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers
on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve and protect
soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the
appearance and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or
wax-based products, or those containing organic
solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing
the gloss in a non-uniform manner.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you
do, it may severely weaken them. In a
crash, they might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean safety belts
only with mild soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During
very cold, damp weather frequent application may
be required. See Recommended Fluids and
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
467
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Washing Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,
depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and
a car washing soap to clean exterior lamps
and lenses. Follow instructions under Washing
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm
or cold water.
Finish Care
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the
sun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong
soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the
vehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.
Approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
that are petroleum based, or that contain acid or
abrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushed
promptly and not allowed to dry on the surface, or
they could stain. Avoid using hard brushes during
cleaning. It may damage your vehicle’s finish. Dry
the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your
vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove
residue from the paint finish. You can get approved
cleaning products from your dealer/retailer. See
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to
the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and
polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter the vehicle. Avoid using high pressure
washes closer than 12 inches (30 cm) to the
surface of the vehicle.
finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive
waxes and polishes that are made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.
468
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and
other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree
sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial
chimneys, etc., can damage your vehicle’s finish if
they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle
as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces
to remove foreign matter.
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper
Blades
Clean the outside of the windshield and backglass
with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly
when you clean the blades. Bugs, road grime,
sap and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments
may cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiper
blades if they are worn or damaged.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,
weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll
over a period of years. You can help to keep
the paint finish looking new by keeping your
vehicle garaged or covered whenever possible.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to
keep their luster. Washing with water is all
that is usually needed. However, you may use
chrome polish on chrome or stainless steel trim, if
necessary.
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid
damaging protective trim, never use auto or
chrome polish, steam or caustic soap to clean
aluminum. A coating of wax, rubbed to high polish,
is recommended for all bright metal parts.
469
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum
wheels could damage the wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
and Trim
Your vehicle may be equipped with either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels,
but avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and
buff off immediately after application.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes, you could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. The
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels through an
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or
cleaners that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you could damage the
surface of the wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Use
only Saturn-approved cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
automatic car wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car
wash that has silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes. These brushes can also damage the
surface of these wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the
painted surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong
soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive
cleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning
brushes on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome polish on
aluminum wheels.
470
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will
provide the corrosion protection while maintaining
the warranty.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire
cleaner.
Finish Damage
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the
paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire
dressing, always wipe off any overspray
from all painted surfaces on your vehicle.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in
the finish should be repaired right away. Bare
metal will corrode quickly and may develop into
major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your
dealer/retailer. Larger areas of finish damage can
be corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s body
and paint shop.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts
repaired or replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
471
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and
dust control can collect on the underbody. If these
are not removed, corrosion and rust can develop
on the underbody parts such as fuel lines,
frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can
create a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can
fall upon and attack painted surfaces on your
vehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,
ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials from
the underbody with plain water. Clean any
areas where mud and debris can collect. Dirt
packed in close areas of the frame should
be loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damaged by this fallout
condition within 12 months or 12,000 miles
(20 000 km) of purchase, whichever occurs first.
472
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one easy step.
No wiping necessary.
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Swirl Remover Polish
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Cleaner Wax
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke, and fingerprints.
Glass Cleaner
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl, and
cloth upholstery.
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather, and carpet.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Spot Lifter
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dust,
Odor Eliminator
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
473
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It
appears on a plate in the front corner of the
instrument panel, on the driver side. You can see
it if you look through the windshield from outside
your vehicle. The VIN also appears on the
Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the
certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine
code. This code helps you identify your vehicle’s
engine, specifications, and replacement parts.
474
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Electrical System
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to
your vehicle unless you check with your
dealer/retailer first. Some electrical equipment
can damage your vehicle and the damage
would not be covered by your warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
High Voltage Devices and Wiring
{CAUTION:
Exposure to high voltage can cause
shock, burns, and even death. The high
voltage systems in your vehicle can only
be serviced by technicians with special
training.
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,
even if your vehicle is not operating.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before
attempting to add anything electrical to your
vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
High voltage devices are identified by
labels. Do not remove, open, take apart, or
modify these devices. High voltage cable
or wiring has orange covering. Do not
probe, tamper with, cut, or modify high
voltage cable or wiring.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats
due to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stop
until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by
some electrical problem, have it fixed.
475
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not
have a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has
the same amperage. Just pick some feature
of your vehicle that you can get along without, like
the radio or cigarette lighter, and use its fuse if
it is the correct amperage. Replace it as soon as
you can.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers in the fuse panel protect the
power windows and other power accessories.
When the current load is too heavy, the circuit
breaker opens and closes, protecting the circuit
until the problem is fixed.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The instrument panel fuse block is located under
the instrument panel on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Pull down on the cover to access the
fuse block.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination of fuses,
circuit breakers and fusible thermal links.
This greatly reduces the chance of fires caused by
electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If
the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.
Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a new one of
the identical size and rating.
476
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
FRT/WSW
SPARE
Usage
Front Windshield Wiper
Spare
HTD/SEAT
Front Heated Seats
STR/WHL/
ILLUM
Steering Wheel Illumination
MSM
Memory Seat Module
PWR/MIRRORS Power Mirrors
DR/LCK
Door Locks
AIRBAG
Airbag System
LT/TRN/SIG
REAR WIPER
Driver Side Turn Signal
Rear Window Wiper
PassKey Module, Body Control
Module
PWR MOD
BCK/UP/STOP Back-up Lamps, Stoplamps
HVAC
Climate Control System
Display
Passenger Side Turn Signal
Daytime Running Lamps
Radio
DISPLAY
RT/TRN/SIG
DRL*
RADIO
PDM
Power Mirrors, Liftgate Release
Fuse Side
477
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
DRL 2**
INFOTAINMENT Infotainment System
Usage
Not Used
BCM
SPARE
CTSY
Body Control Module
Spare
Dome Lamps
INADV/
PWR/LED
Interior Lamps
ONSTR/VENT Emissions
AMP Audio Amplifier
Harness
Usage
Harness Connector
Connector
BODY
478
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
Relays
Usage
LT/PWR/SEAT Driver Side Power Seat Relay
RT/PWR/SEAT Passenger Side Power Seat Relay
PWR/WNDW
The underhood fuse block is located in the engine
compartment, on the passenger side of the
vehicle.
Power Windows Relay
PWR/COLUMN Power Steering Column Relay
L/GATE
LCK
Liftgate Relay
Power Lock Relay
REAR/WSW
UNLCK
DRL2
LT/UNLCK
DRL
Rear Window Washer Relay
Power Unlock Relay
Daytime Running Lamps 2 Relay
Driver Side Unlock Relay
Daytime Running Lamps Relay
Spare
SPARE
FRT/WSW
Front Windshield Washer Relay
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
479
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
480
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
LT PRK
RT PRK
Usage
Left Parking Lamp
Right Parking Lamp
Fuses
ECM
Usage
Engine Control Module
RT HI BEAM Right High-Beam Headlamp
TRLR PRK
LAMP
AIRBAG
PCM IGN
AFS
TRANS
REAR
CAMERA
EMISSION 1 Antilock Brakes System 2
TRLR BRK
AWD
TRLR PWR
EVEN COILS Even Injector Coils
RR HVAC
SPARE
ODD COILS
SPARE
RVC SNSR
RT TRLR
STOP/TRN
ECM 1
SPARE
WPR/WSW
SPARE
PWR OUTLET Power Outlet
AUX POWER Auxiliary Power
Regulated Voltage Control Sensor
Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn
Signal
Engine Control Module 1
Spare
Windshield Wiper/Washer
Spare
Trailer Parking Lamps
Airbag System
Powertrain Control Module Ignition
Adaptive Forward Lighting System
Transmission
Rear Camera
Trailer Brake
All-Wheel-Drive System
Trailer Power
RT LO BEAM Right Low-Beam Headlamp
RR APO
LT LO BEAM Left Low-Beam Headlamp
TCM Transmission Control Module
TRLR BCK/UP Trailer Back-up Lamps
HTD MIR
ABS MTR
FOG LAMP
HORN
Rear Accessory Power Outlet
Rear Climate Control System
Spare
Odd Injector Coils
Spare
Heated Outside Rearview Mirror
Antilock Brake System Motor
Fog Lamps
LT HI BEAM Left High-Beam Headlamp
Horn
SPARE
LT TRLR
STOP/TRN
Spare
A/C CLTCH
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
SPARE Spare
Air Conditioning Clutch
Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn
Signal
EMISSION 2 Emission 2
481
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
J-Case Fuses
Usage
Relays
Usage
FAN 2
Cooling Fan 2
RT TRLR
Trailer Right Stoplamp and Turn
Signal
Trailer Left Stoplamp and Turn
Signal
Ignition Main
Switched Power
STOP/TRN
PWR L/GATE Power Liftgate
FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1
HVAC BLWR Climate Control System Blower
STRTR
BATT 2
HTD WASH
BATT 1
BATT 3
ABS MTR
RR DEFOG
S/ROOF/
SUNSHADE
LT TRLR
STOP/TRN
IGN
CRNK
PWR/TRN
HI BEAM
WPR
Starter
Battery 2
Heated Windshield Washer System
Battery 1
Battery 3
Powertrain
High-Beam Headlamps
Windshield Wiper
Windshield Wiper High Speed
Rear Window Defogger
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Low-Beam Headlamps
Spare
Fog Lamps
Horn
WPR HI
RR DEFOG
Antilock Brake System Motor
Rear Defogger
HID/LO BEAM
Sunroof, Sunshade
SPARE
FOG LAMP
HORN
A/C CMPRSR
CLTCH
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
TRLR BCK/UP Trailer Back-up Lamps
Relays
FAN 3
FAN 2
PRK LAMP
FAN 1
Usage
Cooling Fan 3
Cooling Fan 2
Park Lamp
Air Conditioning Compressor Clutch
Cooling Fan 1
482
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Transmission Fluid
Wheel Nut Torque
12.0 qt
5.5 qt
22.0 gal
9.5 qt
11.4 L
5.2 L
83.3 L
9.0 L
140 lb ft
190 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
3.6L V6
7
Automatic
0.043 inches (1.10 mm)
483
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
484
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to
keep your vehicle in good working condition, but
also helps the environment. All recommended
maintenance is important. Improper vehicle
maintenance can even affect the quality of the
air we breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong
tire inflation can increase the level of emissions
from your vehicle. To help protect our environment,
and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level
and change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,
inspections, replacement parts, and
recommended fluids and lubricants as
prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep
your vehicle in good working condition. Any
damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be covered by warranty.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in
good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You might drive
very short distances only a few times a week.
Or you might drive long distances all the time
in very hot, dusty weather. You might use
your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might
drive it to work, to do errands, or in many
other ways.
486
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might
need more frequent checks and replacements.
So please read the following and note how
you drive. If you have any questions on how
to keep your vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer/retailer.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a
vehicle can be dangerous. In trying to do
some jobs, you can be seriously injured.
Do your own maintenance work only if
you have the required know-how and the
proper tools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, see your
dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within
recommended limits. You will find these limits
on the Tire and Loading Information label.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
legal driving limits.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and
have the necessary equipment, you should
have your dealer/retailer do these jobs.
should be performed when indicated. See
information.
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your
service needs, you will know that trained and
supported service technicians will perform the
work using genuine parts.
487
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you want to purchase service information, see
page 518.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
comes on, it means that service is required for your
vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km).
It is possible that, if you are driving under the best
conditions, the engine oil life system might not
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over
a year. However, the engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the
system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service technicians who will perform this
work using genuine parts and reset the system.
you what should be checked, when to check it,
and what you can easily do to help keep your
vehicle in good condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and
lubricants to use are listed in Recommended
When your vehicle is serviced, make sure these
are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer/retailer.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset
accidentally, you must service your vehicle within
3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.
Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
page 390 for information on the Engine Oil Life
System and resetting the system.
488
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message
appears, certain services, checks, and inspections
are required. Required services are described
in the following for “Maintenance I” and
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message comes on
within 10 months since the vehicle was purchased
or Maintenance II was performed.
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended
that your first service be Maintenance I, your
second service be Maintenance II, and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the
previous service performed was Maintenance I.
Always use Maintenance II whenever the message
comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at
all for one year.
Maintenance II may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
page 494.
•
•
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
489
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j).
490
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(40 000)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission fluid
(severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
(normal service).
Replace spark plugs and inspect spark
plug wires. An Emission Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (k).
491
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
that are worn or damaged. See Windshield Wiper
Backglass, and Wiper Blades on page 469 for
more information.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,
etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
for surface condition. Inspect other brake
parts, including calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and
all belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are working properly. Look for
any other loose or damaged safety belt system
parts. If you see anything that might keep a safety
belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular
maintenance.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.
Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace
with genuine parts as needed. To help ensure
proper operation, a pressure test of the cooling
system and pressure cap and cleaning the outside
of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assemblies, secondary latches, pivots, spring
anchor and release pawl, hood and door hinges,
rear folding seats, and liftgate hinges. More
frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth
will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking,
or contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper
blades, if contaminated. Replace wiper blades
492
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could
indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid
if needed.
(j) Check system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts
as needed. Replace any components that have
high effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate
accelerator or cruise control cables.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more
of these conditions:
(k) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive
cracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt if
necessary.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,
inspect the filter at each engine oil change.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Owner Checks and Services
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
These owner checks and services should be
performed at the intervals specified to help ensure
the safety, dependability, and emission control
performance of your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer
can assist you with these checks and services.
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system.
This service can be complex; you should have
your dealer/retailer perform this service. See
Engine Coolant on page 396 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at
once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added
to your vehicle, make sure they are the proper
ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and
493
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget
to check the spare tire. See Inflation - Tire
spare tire is stored securely. See Changing a Flat
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper
further details.
Notice: It is important to check the engine
oil regularly and keep it at the proper
level. Failure to keep the engine oil at the
proper level can cause damage to the engine
not covered by your warranty.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage
highway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System
service notification. Check the tires for wear
and, if necessary, rotate the tires. See Tire
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir and add
the proper fluid if necessary.
494
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the
vehicle moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle. It should be parked
on a level surface.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough
room around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
ready to turn off the engine immediately if it
starts.
Be ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,
but do not start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift
lever out of PARK (P) with normal effort.
If the shift lever moves out of PARK (P),
contact your dealer/retailer for service.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The
vehicle should start only in PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in any
other position, contact your dealer/retailer for
service.
495
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular
brake, set the parking brake.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try
to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift lever
position.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal. Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
• The ignition should turn to OFF only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to
PARK (P). Then release the parking
brake followed by the regular brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
{CAUTION:
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take
care to clean thoroughly any areas where mud
and other debris can collect.
When you are doing this check, your
vehicle could begin to move. You or
others could be injured and property
could be damaged. Make sure there is
room in front of your vehicle in case it
begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
496
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Key Lock
Cylinders
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer.
Carrier
Assembly —
Differential
(Rear Drive
Module) and
Transfer
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021677,
in Canada 89021678) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets GM
Case (Power
Transfer Unit)
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Standard GM6094M and displays
the American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
Engine Oil
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring
Anchor, and
Release Pawl
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 396.
Engine Coolant
Hood and
Door Hinges
and Rear
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Folding Seat
Windshield
Washer
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
in Canada 89021186).
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
Conditioning
Power Steering
System
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Automatic
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
497
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Part
Part Number
15278634
89017524
12611882
ACDelco® Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
—
PF48
41-107
Spark Plugs
Windshield Wiper Blades
Right – 20.8 inches (53. cm)
Left – 24.6 inches (62.5 cm)
Rear – 11.6 inches (30.0 cm)
15254804
15254805
15276259
—
—
—
498
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the
following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
500
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
501
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
502
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, contact
the Saturn Customer Communication Centre at
1-800-263-1999. A Saturn Customer Assistance
Center team member will handle your call and
assist in providing product and warranty
information, the nearest retailer location, roadside
assistance, brochures, literature and discuss any
concerns you may have.
Customer Assistance and
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important
to your retailer and to Saturn. Together we
are committed to providing our customers with
unparalleled service, before, during, and after the
purchase of a Saturn vehicle, for total customer
satisfaction. We call this the Saturn Difference.
Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction
or the operation of your vehicle are resolved by
your retailer’s sales or service departments.
If, for any reason, your ownership experience
falls below your expectations, we suggest
you take the following action:
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in
order to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please
have the following information available to give the
Customer Assistance Representative:
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This
17-digit number can be found on the vehicle
registration or title, on the upper driver side
corner of the dash, or on your roadside
assistance key card.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail
facility.
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer
Assistance Liaison. Any member of the retail
management team has the authority and the desire
to resolve your concerns. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at this level.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
When contacting Saturn, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s
facility. That is why we suggest you follow
Step One first if you have a concern.
STEP TWO: Should you need additional
assistance, in the U.S., contact the
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
504
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and
its retailers are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle.
However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after
following the procedure outlined in Steps One and
Two, Saturn and its retailers offer the additional
assistance of a neutral party through our voluntary
participation in a mediation/arbitration program
called Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the
toll-free telephone number or by writing them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court
program administered by the Council of Better
Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes
regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. This program
is available at no cost to you, our customer.
This program is available in all 50 states and
the District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited
by vehicle age, mileage and other factors.
Saturn Corporation reserves the right to change
eligibility limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
Although you may be required to resort to this
informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a
court action, use of the program is free of charge
and your case is generally heard within 40 days.
If you do not agree with the decision given in your
case, you can reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
505
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning eligibility
in the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the Saturn Customer
Communication Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or
you may write to:
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your
concerns have been addressed after following
the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2,
General Motors of Canada Limited has committed
to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program
is designed so that the entire dispute settlement
process, from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be completed
in approximately 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied by your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
informal, quick, and free of charge.
506
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
My GM Canada is a password-protected section
of gmcanada.com where you can save information
on GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and
use handy tools and forms with greater ease.
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
The Owner Center is a resource for your Saturn
ownership needs. Specific vehicle information can
be found in one place.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services
you will have access to:
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
• Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of
your preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
• Access information about your specific
vehicle, including tips and videos and
an electronic version of this owner manual.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history
and maintenance schedule.
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile,
subscribe to E-News and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GM
Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.
507
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-800-553-6000
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000
To assist owners who have hearing
difficulties, Saturn has installed special TDD
(Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf)
equipment in its Saturn Customer Assistance
Center.
In Canada, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Any hearing- or speech-impaired customer
who has access to a TDD or to a conventional
Text Telephone (TTY) can communicate with
Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users
in Canada may dial 1-800-263-3830.
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
Customer Assistance Offices
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write
to Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
508
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, customers may call the
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
at 1-800-263-1999. TTY users in Canada
may call 1-800-263-3830.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call
1-800-553-6000; (Text Telephone (TTY):
1-800-833-6000).
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call
1-800-268-6800.
This program, available to qualified applicants,
can reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible
aftermarket driver or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require for your vehicle such
as hand controls, wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program.
The offer is available for a limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the
Saturn Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-553-6000. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-6000.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,
a person driving this vehicle without the consent
of the owner is not eligible for coverage.
509
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Services Provided
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway
or Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn
retailer for warranty service or in the event
of a vehicle-disabling accident. Winch-out
assistance is provided when the vehicle is
mired in sand, mud, or snow.
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first, and, in Canada only, up to a
maximum of $100.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, service
to provide diesel may be restricted. For safety
reasons, propane and other alternative fuels
are not provided through this service.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in
good condition, when equipped and properly
inflated, is covered at no charge. The customer
is responsible for the repair or replacement of
the tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at
• Lock-out Service: Lock-out service is covered
at no charge if you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock may be available
if you have an active OnStar® subscription.
To ensure security, the driver must present
personal identification before lock-out service is
provided. In Canada, the vehicle registration is
also required.
no charge if the vehicle does not start.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you
detailed, computer personalized maps,
highlighting your choice of either the most
direct route or the most scenic route to your
destination, anywhere in North America, along
with helpful travel information pertaining to
your trip.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests are limited
to six per calendar year.
510
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada only): In the event of a warranty
related vehicle disablement, while en route and
over 250 kilometres from the original point of
departure, you might qualify for trip interruption
expense assistance. This assistance covers
reasonable reimbursement of up to a maximum
of $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of
$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night),
and (C) alternate ground transportation
(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned expense you
may incur while waiting for your vehicle to be
repaired.
• Alternative Service (Canada only): There
could be times when Roadside Assistance
cannot provide timely assistance. Your advisor
may authorize you to secure local emergency
road service, and you will be reimbursed up to
$100 upon submission of the original receipt to
Roadside Assistance.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be
covered. However, any cost for parts and labor
for non-warranty repairs are the responsibility
of the driver.
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited
reserve the right to limit services or reimbursement
to an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,
the claims become excessive in frequency or type
of occurrence.
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts,
and a copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your
advisor will help you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how to claim for
trip interruption expense assistance.
511
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Calling for Assistance
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside
Assistance Representatives:
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles
operated on a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused by a violation
of local, Municipal, State, Provincial or Federal
law, and mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included
in the coverage provided by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Saturn and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to make any
changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without notification.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
of the vehicle
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
512
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
your vehicle’s originally designed appearance
and safety performance, however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts are not
covered by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any related failures are not
covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it
is damaged, have the damage repaired by
a qualified technician using the proper equipment
and quality replacement parts. Poorly performed
collision repairs diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can be
Aftermarket collision parts are also available.
These are made by companies other than GM
and may not have been tested for your vehicle.
As a result, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit
premature durability/corrosion problems, and
may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts are not covered by
that warranty.
compromised in subsequent collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts
made with the same materials and construction
methods as the parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are
your best choice to assure that your vehicle’s
designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can
help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision
repair facility that meets your needs before you
ever need collision repairs. Your Saturn retailer
may have a collision repair center with GM-trained
technicians and state of the art equipment, or
be able to recommend a collision repair center
that has GM-trained technicians and comparable
equipment.
Recycled original equipment parts may also
be used for repair. These parts are typically
removed from vehicles that were total losses in
prior accidents. In most cases, the parts being
recycled are from undamaged sections of
the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain
513
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insuring Your Vehicle
If an Accident Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality
of coverage afforded by various insurance policy
terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced
protection to your GM vehicle by limiting
Here is what to do if you are involved in an
accident.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you
are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that
no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
compensation for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision
parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend
that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not available
from your current insurance carrier, consider
switching to another insurance carrier.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.
Do not leave the scene of an accident until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or
you are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested
information to police and other parties involved
in the accident. Do not discuss your personal
condition, mental frame of mind, or anything
unrelated to the accident. This helps guard
against post-accident legal action.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company
may require you to have insurance that assures
repairs with Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or Genuine
Manufacturer replacement parts. Read your
lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• If you need roadside assistance, call
GM Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
information.
514
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where
the towing service is taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone
number.
• If possible, call your insurance company from
the scene of the accident. They will walk you
through the information they need. If they ask
for a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you
can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before
it is towed away. Make sure this includes your
insurance information and registration if you
keep these items in your vehicle.
• Gather the important information you need from
the other driver. Things like name, address,
phone number, driver’s license number, vehicle
license plate, vehicle make, model and model
year, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN),
insurance company and policy number, and a
general description of the damage to the other
vehicle.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for
your vehicle. Whether you select a Saturn
retailer or a private collision repair facility to fix
the damage, make sure you are comfortable
with them. Remember, you will have to feel
comfortable with their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully
and make sure you understand what work will
be performed on your vehicle. If you have a
question, ask for an explanation. Reputable
shops welcome this opportunity.
515
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s
collision policy repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company. In such cases,
you can have control of the repair and parts choices
as long as cost stays within reasonable limits.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage
repairs, GM recommends that you take an active
role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,
or have it towed there. Specify to the facility
that any required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either new Genuine
GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
Remember, recycled parts are not covered
by your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the
repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
your repair professional, and insist on Genuine
GM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased you
may be obligated to have the vehicle repaired with
Genuine GM parts, even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it could
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your retailer or Saturn
Corporation.
516
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport
Canada) in a situation like this, please notify
Saturn.
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington, D.C. 20590
Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
Reporting Safety Defects to
the Canadian Government
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your
vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, in addition to notifying
General Motors of Canada Limited. Call them
at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
517
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner Publications
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and
as described below is applicable only in the fifty
U.S. states and the District of Columbia, and only
for cars and light trucks with a Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) less than 10,000 pounds
(4 536 kg). Copies of individual bulletins are also at
your participating Saturn retailer. You can ask to
see them.
Service Manuals
A variety of publications are available to you.
Saturn service manuals are written for trained
technicians, and in some cases, specialized
tools and equipment are necessary to complete
certain repairs. However, the manuals are
available to owners who either have the training,
or wish to gain a greater understanding of the
technical aspect of their Saturn.
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your
Saturn retailer.
For additional publications information or
to order publications in the United States,
call toll free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
www.saturn-publications.com to order on-line.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available
by calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
518
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Bulletins
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors
product performance in the field. We then prepare
bulletins for servicing our products better. You
can get these bulletins, too.
Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the
vehicle’s performance and how it is driven. For
example, your vehicle uses computer modules
to monitor and control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the conditions for airbag
deployment and deploy airbags in a crash and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking to help the
driver control the vehicle. These modules may store
data to help your dealer/retailer technician service
your vehicle. Some modules may also store data
about how you operate the vehicle, such as rate
of fuel consumption or average speed. These
modules may also retain the owner’s personal
preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain
to the proper use and care of your vehicle.
Some describe costly repairs. Others describe
inexpensive repairs which, if done on time with
the latest parts, may avoid future costly repairs.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair
a new or unexpected condition. Others describe
a quicker way to fix your vehicle. They can help
a technician service your vehicle better.
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a
small number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer
or a qualified technician may have to determine
if a specific bulletin applies to your vehicle.
To order Saturn bulletins, call Saturn
Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
www.saturn-publications.com to order online.
519
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as
an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
Saturn will not access this data or share it with
others except: with the consent of the vehicle
owner or, if the vehicle is leased, with the consent
of the lessee; in response to an official request
of police or similar government office; as part
of Saturn’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process; or, as required by law.
Data that Saturn collects or receives may
also be used for Saturn research needs or
may be made available to others for research
purposes, where a need is shown and the data
is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding
of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no
data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving
520
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar
Radio Frequency
If your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribe
to the OnStar® services, please refer to the
OnStar® Terms and Conditions for information
information.
Identification (RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles
for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and
ignition system security, as well as in connection
with conveniences such as key fobs for remote
door locking/unlocking and starting, and in-vehicle
transmitters for garage door openers. RFID
technology in Saturn vehicles does not use or
record personal information or link with any other
Saturn system containing personal information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system,
use of the system may result in the storage of
destinations, addresses, telephone numbers,
and other trip information. Please refer to
the navigation system operating manual for
information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
521
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
522
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System (cont.)
524
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
525
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
526
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 228
Electrical System (cont.)
527
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel (cont.)
F
528
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 172
529
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Light (cont.)
K
Keyless Entry System ................................... 98
530
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lockout Protection ....................................... 109
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
531
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
Navigation System, Privacy ......................... 521
532
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 214
533
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 108
534
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts (cont.)
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 43
535
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
536
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires (cont.)
537
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield (cont.)
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 209
538
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
